Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal Russellville, Arkansas 10/26/2021 ATU Project No. B021078 BE Project No. ATU-001 Prepared by
Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation B021078: Bid Proposal
Russellville, Arkansas
10/26/2021
ATU Project No. B021078
BE Project No. ATU-001
Prepared by
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0
SECTION TITLE
00001 COVER SHEET
00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS
00020 INVITATION TO BID
00030 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
00100 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
00300 BID FORM
00312 BID BOND
00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS
00480 NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
00500 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
00600 ARKANSAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
00640 WARRANTY BOND
00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800A PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION
00840 NOTICE OF AWARD
00845 NOTICE TO PROCEED
01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
01045 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING
01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01200 PROJECT MEETINGS
01300 SUBMITTALS
01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-2
DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL
SECTION TITLE
230010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
230015 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKESTOPPING
230020 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
230030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
230075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
230086 PIPING INSULATION
230090 SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS
230120 PIPING SPECIALTIES
230150 HYDRONIC PIPING
230160 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
230705 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
230710 HVAC SHEET METAL
230895 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
230990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
239000 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
SECTION TITLE
220160 NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
SECTION TITLE
260000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
END OF SECTION 00010
00020-1
SECTION 00020
INVITATION TO BID
Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation
Arkansas Tech University will accept sealed bids for the Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation. Bid forms
should be addressed to Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services at Arkansas Tech University
and will be received at Arkansas Tech University, Young Building, 203 West O Street, Russellville, AR
72801, (479) 968-0269 until 2:00 pm CST, Oct 26, 2021 and then publicly opened and read aloud at RCB
(Brown) Hall Rm 355, 105 W O St, Russellville, AR 72801.
Details may be found on the ATU Procurement website: www.atu.edu/purchasing
A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh Hall located at
Arkansas Tech University, 1310 N El Paso Ave, Russellville, AR 72801.
Building access and site work may begin no sooner than December 15, 2021. Contractor shall coordinate
delivery and storage of owner furnished air handler with owner and air handler vendor.
Arkansas Tech University reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive defects in bids.
For information concerning the proposed work, contact Melanie Richardson, Brown Engineers, LLC, at
17200 Chenal Pkwy Ste. 300 PMB 324, Little Rock, AR 72223 501-448-0100 ext. 157.
Minority and small business vendors or contractors are encouraged to bid on any and all Arkansas Tech
University projects.
Bids received later than the specified time and date will be returned to the bidder unopened.
END OF SECTION 00020
00030-1
SECTION 00030
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
Sealed bids for Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation will be received by Arkansas
Tech University, “Owner”, at Arkansas Tech University, Young Building, 203 West O Street,
Russellville, AR 72801, (479) 968-0269 until 2:00 pm CST, Oct 26, 2021 and then publicly opened and
read aloud at RCB (Brown) Hall Rm 355, 105 W O St, Russellville, AR 72801.
Details may be found on the ATU Procurement website: www.atu.edu/purchasing
All proposals shall be on the forms furnished with the Specifications and shall be enclosed in a sealed
envelope addressed to “Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services at Arkansas Tech University”
and marked "Bid for Bid Proposal B021078: Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation.” Bids shall be
accompanied by a cashier's or certified check upon a national or state bank in an amount not less than five
percent (5%) of the total maximum bid price payable without recourse to Arkansas Tech University or a bid
bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into a
contract and execute performance and payment bonds within ten (10) days after notice of award of Contract
to Bidder. The notice of award of Contract shall be given by the Owner within ten (10) days following the
opening of bids. The successful Bidder must furnish a performance and payment bond upon the form
provided in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price from an approved surety
company holding a permit from the State of Arkansas to act as surety, or other surety or sureties acceptable
to the Owner.
A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh Hall located at:
Arkansas Tech University
1310 N El Paso Ave
Russellville, AR 72801
Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders are required
to attend and participate in the conference. Bidders will be required to inform themselves of all addenda
duly issued.
Building access and site work may begin no sooner than December 15, 2021. Contractor shall coordinate
delivery and storage of owner furnished air handler with owner and air handler vendor.
00030-2
All bidders must be licensed in accordance with the requirements of the Arkansas Contractors
Licensing Board in accordance with Act 150 of the 1965, as amended. All bidders must be qualified in all
respects to do business in Arkansas.
Bids will be considered on the basis of cost, the Bidder's financial responsibility, his equipment, and his past
performance in completing similar work. Arkansas Tech University reserves the right to reject any or all
bids, in whole or in part, or award items separately, or to waive informalities in bids received.
Bids must remain in effect for 60 days after the bid opening date.
00100-1
SECTION 00100
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
1. DEFINED TERMS
1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders, which are defined in the Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract, have the meanings assigned to them in the
General Conditions. The term “Bidder” means one who submits a Bid directly to
OWNER, as distinct from Sub-Bidder, who submits a Bid to a Bidder. The term
“Successful Bidder” means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to
whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER’S evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an
award. The term “Bidding Documents” included the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,
Information for Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including
all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
2. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.1 Complete sets of Bidding Documents in the number and for the deposit sum, if any,
stated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid may be obtained from the OWNER.
Deposit for Bidding Documents are non-refundable.
2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; the OWNER does
not assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of the
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
2.3 The OWNER in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms does
so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or
grant for any other use. All Bidding Documents shall remain the property of the OWNER
and ENGINEER, and any use of the Bidding Documents for any purpose other than the
bidding of the Project is strictly prohibited.
3. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.1 Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s qualifications to do business in the state
where the Project is located.
3.2 Qualifications shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope at the date and time listed
on the Bid Proposal. Refer to Section 00420 – Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications.
4. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
4.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that
may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider Federal,
State and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or
furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder’s observations with the
Contract Documents, and (e) notify ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies
in the Contract Documents.
00100-2
4.1.1 Determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the
Work.
4.1.2. Become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by OWNER
and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding
Documents.
4.2 No geotechnical or subsurface information is provided for this work The Bidder shall
make further investigations and tests as the Bidder deems necessary in order to provide
the Work at the Contract Price, within Contract Time, and in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the General Documents.
4.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to the
Owner by Owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and Owner does not assume
responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof, unless it is expressly provided
otherwise in the Supplemental Conditions.
4.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to the
prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities and other physical
conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions
appear in Paragraph 4.2 and 4.3 of the General Conditions.
4.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will be responsible to make or obtain such
explorations, tests and data concerning physical conditions (surface, subsurface and
Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise, which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and
other terms and conditions the Contract Documents.
4.6 On request in advance, OWNER will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct
such explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid.
Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations. A representative of the OWNER shall be present during
all tests.
4.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights of way and easements for
access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work
are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required
for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be
provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in
existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER.
4.8 Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the general
nature of work that is to be performed at the site by OWNER or others (such as utilities
and other prime contractors) that relates to the work for which a Bid is to be submitted.
On request, OWNER will provide to each Bidder for examination access to or copies of
Contract Documents (other than portions thereof related to price) for such work.
00100-3
4.9 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that
Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the
Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding
Documents and applying any specific means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction that may be shown or indicated or expressly required by the
Bidding Documents, that Bidder has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts,
errors, ambiguities and discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding
Documents and that the written resolutions thereof by ENGINEER are acceptable to
Bidder, and that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the Work.
4.10 The provisions of 4.1 through 4.8, inclusive, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated
Biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material covered by
Paragraph 4.06 of the General Conditions.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE
4.11 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held as stated in the Invitation to Bid.
Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project.
Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will
transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda, as ENGINEER deems
necessary, in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be
relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective.
SITE AND OTHER AREAS
4.12 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for
access thereto and other lands designated for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the
Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto
required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of
materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for
by CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in
existing facilities are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided
in the Contract Documents.
5. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in
writing to ENGINEER. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by
ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered
to all parties recorded by ENGINEER as having received the Bidding Documents.
Questions received less than three (3) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not
be answered. Only questions answered by formal, written Addenda will be binding. Oral
and other interpretations will be without legal effect.
5.2 Prior to the deadline for receiving Bids, Addenda may also be issued to modify the
Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER.
00100-4
6. BID SECURITY
6.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to OWNER in an amount
of five (5) percent of the Bidder’s maximum bid price and in the form of a certified or
bank check or a Bid Bond (on form attached, if a form is prescribed), issued by a surety.
6.2 The Bid security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until Bidder has executed the
Agreement and furnished the required Contract security, whereupon the Bid security will
be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and
furnish the required Contract security within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award,
OWNER may annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earliest or the
seventh (7th) day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or the sixty-first (61st) day
after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders will be
returned. Bid security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven
(7) days after the Bid opening.
7. CONTRACT TIME
7.1 The number of days within which the Work is to be substantially completed and also
completed and ready for final payment (the Contract Time) are set forth in the Agreement
and these Contract Documents.
8. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
8.1 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement.
9. SUBSTITUTE OR “OR EQUAL” ITEMS
9.1 The Bid shall be base on the specific products or their approval equal described on the
Drawings or written in the Specifications. Any product may be used which is specified by
the referenced standards (such as ASTM) and which meets those standards. For products
which are specified by naming one or more manufacturers preceded by “equal to” or
followed by “or equal,” a written request for substitution shall be submitted for approval
by the ENGINEER. Such written requests will be considered up to ten (10) days prior to
the scheduled Bid opening.
10. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS
10.1 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers
and other persons and organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal
items of material and equipment) to be submitted to Owner in advance of a specified date
prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, apparent Successful Bidder, and any other
Bidder so requested, shall within five (5) working days after Bid opening submit to
OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations
proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is required. Such
list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent information
regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
Subcontractor, Supplier, person or organization if requested by Owner. An Owner or
Engineer who after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed
00100-5
Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization, may before Notice of Award is
given request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an
increase in Bid price.
10.2 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, OWNER may
award the contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations. The declining to make
requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any
Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization listed and to whom
OWNER or ENGINEER does not make written objection prior to the giving of Notice of
Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of
such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Agreement as provided in paragraph
6.06.B of the General Conditions.
10.3 No CONTRACTOR shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other
person or organization against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.
10.4 Trade (including, but not necessarily limited to electrical, plumbing and mechanical)
permits are required for the respective subcontractors to obtain City inspection.
11. BID FORM
11.1 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.
11.2 All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink or by typewriter. Erasures and
alterations must be initialed and dated by the signer in ink.
11.3 Unit process and lump sum amounts shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of
discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern and the unit price will govern over
the extended amount.
11.4 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice
president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and
the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary.
The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature.
11.5 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner,
whose title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership
must be shown below the signature.
11.6 All names must be typed or printed below the signature.
11.7 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of
which must be filled in on the Bid Form).
11.8 The address, telephone number, and fax number if applicable for communications
regarding the Bid must be shown.
11.9 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a
member and accompanied by evidence of the authority to sign. The state of formation of
the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown below the signature.
00100-6
11.10 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.
11.11 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by each joint venture in the manner indicated
on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture must be shown below the
signature.
12. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
12.1 Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation
to Bid. Bids shall be bound in the original project manual and shall be enclosed in an
opaque sealed envelope, marked with the Project Title (and, if applicable, the designated
position of the Project for which the Bid is submitted) and name, address, and
contractor’s license number of the Bidder, and accompanied by the Bid security and other
required documents. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the
sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation “BID
ENCLOSED” on the face of it.
13. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
13.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.
13.2 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed,
written notice with the OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable
satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation
of its Bids, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned.
Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the Work to be
provided under the Contract Documents.
14. OPENING OF BIDS
14.1 Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly. An
abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made
available to the Bidders after the opening of the Bids. Bids will be returned without being
read aloud if all applicable portions of the Contract Documents are not met by the Bidder.
15. BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
15.1 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid
opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid
security prior to that date.
16. AWARD OF CONTRACT
16.1 OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities
and to negotiate Contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all
nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves
the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the
best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is
00100-7
not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet
any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies in the
multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices.
Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum
thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
16.2 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and
other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
OWNER may accept any such alternatives in any order or combination, whether in the
order in which they are listed in the Bid Form or not.
16.3 OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers,
and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which
the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be
submitted as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. OWNER also may consider the
operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major
items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data
is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.
16.4 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the
evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and
organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents to OWNER’s satisfaction within the prescribed time.
16.5 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest Bidder whose evaluation
by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the
Project.
16.6 If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of
Award within sixty (60) days after the day of the Bid opening.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
16.7 Attention of Bidders is directed to Supplementary Conditions, included in these
documents for provisions concerning scope of work, completion time, availability of
plans, specifications and other documents, payment and similar subjects.
17. CONTRACT SECURITY
17.1 The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER’s
requirements as to performance and payment Bonds and a Warranty Bond. When the
Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, it must be accompanied
by the required performance and payment Bonds. At the time of Final Acceptance, the
Contractor shall provide the OWNER the Warranty Bond.
18. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
18.1 When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied
by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement and all other written
00100-8
Contract Documents attached. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and
deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to
OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver
one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a
complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification.
19. PRE-BID CONFERENCE
19.1 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held on October 19th, at 10:00 am at Crabaugh
Hall located at:
Arkansas Tech University
1310 N El Paso Ave
Russellville, AR 72801
Representatives of OWNER and ENGINEER will be present to discuss the Project.
Bidders are required to attend and participate in the conference. ENGINEER will
transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as ENGINEER considers
necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Bidders are reminded that
any representation or understandings arising from any such Pre-Bid Conference shall not
supercede the written provision of the Contract Documents themselves.
20. RETAINAGE
20.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the General Contract and Supplemental
Conditions.
21. SPECIAL LEGAL REQUIREMENTS
21.1 Attention of Bidders is called to Act 150, Acts of Arkansas 1965, concerning the
licensing of contractors to do business in Arkansas.
21.2 It is conclusively presumed that Bidders have familiarized themselves with Arkansas
laws which may be applied to a Contract for the Work proposed herein as the
aforementioned Acts are not exclusive. It is further conclusively presumed that Bidders
have familiarized themselves with Federal and local laws, ordinances and regulations
pertaining to the Work proposed herein.
END OF SECTION 00100
00300-1
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Arkansas Tech University
Bid no. B021078
Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: Jessica Holloway, APO, Director Business Services
Arkansas Tech University
Young Building, 203 West O Street
Russellville, AR 72801
THIS BID IS SUBMITTED BY:
ADDRESS:
ARTICLE 1. The undersigned BIDDER proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an
agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform and furnish all Work
as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time
indicated in the Agreement and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 2. BIDDER accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Advertisement or Invitation to
Bid and Instructions to BIDDERs, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid
security. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of Bid opening.
BIDDER will sign and submit the Agreement with the Bonds and other documents required by the
Contract Documents within fifteen days after the date of OWNER’s Notice of Award.
ARTICLE 3. In submitting this Bid, BIDDER represents, as more fully set forth in the Agreement,
that:
3.1 BIDDER has examined copies of all the Contract Documents and of the following Addenda
(receipt of which is hereby acknowledged):
Date Number Authorized Signature
00300-2
3.2 BIDDER has visited the site and become familiarized with the nature and extent of the Contract
Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner
may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work.
3.3 BIDDER has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully
studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies which pertain to the
subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or
furnishing of the Work as BIDDER considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at
the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraphs 4.02 and 4.03 of the General
Conditions, and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar
information or data are or will be required by BIDDER for such purposes.
3.4 BIDDER has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract
Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes
responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data in respect of said Underground
Facilities are or will be required by BIDDER in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract
Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.04 of the General Conditions.
3.5 BIDDER has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations,
explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 BIDDER has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has
discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to
BIDDER.
3.7 This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, firm or
corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association,
organization or corporation; BIDDER has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other
BIDDER to submit a false or sham Bid; BIDDER has not solicited or induced any person, firm or
corporation to refrain from bidding, and BIDDER has not sought by collusion to obtain for itself any
advantage over any other BIDDER or over OWNER.
ARTICLE 4. Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the
following, as specified in text form, and numerically:
00300-3
4.1 BIDDER’S BID AMOUNT
Item
No.
Estimated
Quantity Unit Description and Unit Price in Words
Total Amount
(in Figures)
1 1 LS All supervision, labor, materials, tools,
equipment, incidentals and related items
required for construction of the Crabaugh Hall
HVAC Renovation , the sum of
_______
________________________________Dollars
and Cents
$
The Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation will be awarded to the lowest qualified BIDDER for the Work to
be included.
4.2 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS
The following information gives the name, business address, and portion of work (description and dollar
amount of work to be done) for each subcontractor that will be used in the work if the BIDDER is
awarded the Contract. No subcontractor doing work in excess of 3 percent of the total amount of the Bid
who is not listed below shall be used without the written approval of the OWNER.
Additional supporting data may be attached to this page. Each page shall be sequentially numbered and
headed “Proposed Subcontractors”, and shall be signed.
Firm Name Business Address Description of Work Dollar Amount
00300-4
4.3 PROPOSED EQUIPMENT LIST
The BIDDER is required to list the major proposed equipment as outlined in the relevant Technical
Specifications as part of the proposed Work.
Specification Equipment Manufacturer
ARTICLE 5. BIDDER agrees that the Work will be completed within the following time(s):
5.1 BIDDER agrees to be Substantially Completed with the Item No. 1 within 130 calendar days of
the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, and, if Substantial Completion is not achieved by this date, to
pay liquidated damages in the amount of $500/day for each additional day until Substantial
Completion for Item No. 1 is achieved. Building access and site work may begin no sooner than
December 15, 2021. BIDDER agrees that the project will be completed and Ready for Final Payment
within 30 calendar days after Substantial Completion of all contracted work in accordance with Article 14
of the General Conditions.
5.2 BIDDER accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to Liquidated Damages in the event of
failure to complete the Work within the times specified in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 6. The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid:
6.1 Required Bid Security in the form of a certified check or a Bid Bond in the amount of 5% of the
total Bid price.
6.2 Noncollusion Affidavit.
ARTICLE 7. Communications concerning this Bid shall be addressed to the following address:
Melanie C. Richardson, PE
Brown Engineers, LLC
17200 Chenal Pkwy. Suite 300 PMB 324
Little Rock, AR 72223
Phone: (501) 448-0100 ext. 157
00300-5
ARTICLE 8. The terms used in this Bid which are defined in the General Conditions or
Instructions to BIDDERS will have the meanings assigned to them.
BIDDER submitting this BID is:
A Corporation, incorporated in the State of
A Partnership, consisting of the following partners, whose full names are:
An Individual whose full name is:
SUBMITTED on , 2021.
(Name of BIDDER)
Approved By
(Authorized Signature) (Title)
Attested By
(Authorized Signature) (Address)
Seal
(If a Corporation) (City and State) (Zip Code)
(Telephone Number)
(Facsimile Number)
END OF SECTION 00300
00312-1
SECTION 00312
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned,
____________________________________________________________ as Principal, and
____________________________________________________________ as Surety, are hereby held and
firmly bound unto the Arkansas Tech University, hereinafter called the OWNER in the penal sum of
Five percent of the Amount Bid (5% of bid) for payment of which,
well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors and assigns.
The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the
Owner a certain BID, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing, for
Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation at Arkansas Tech University
.
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a) If said BID shall be rejected, or
(b) If said BID shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the
Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said BID) and
shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment
of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall
in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said BID, then
this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims
hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such
of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be
signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
00312-2
Signed, this day of , 20 .
(Principal)
By:
(Surety)
By:
END OF SECTION 00312
00420-1
SECTION 00420
STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS – PRIME CONTRACTOR
All requests must be addressed in writing and the data given must be clear and comprehensive.
All bidders shall submit a Statement of Qualifications that addresses the requested items listed below.
This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets.
The BIDDER may submit any additional information he/she desires.
A. REQUESTS REGARDING BIDDER
1. Name of Bidder.
2. Permanent main office address.
3. When organized.
4. If a corporation, where incorporated.
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your
present firm or trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the
anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of work performed by your company.
8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? (If so, where and
why?)
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? (If so, where and why?)
10. List similar projects of the size and magnitude of this Project which were
completed by your company, stating the cost for each and the month and year
completed. Include the entity for which the work was performed with names,
titles and phone numbers.
11. List your major equipment currently available for this contract and designate
whether owned or leased.
12. Background and experience of field personnel currently employed by your
organization who will perform the work.
13. Background and experience of the principal members (officers) of your
organization. Include president, vice president, secretary, treasurer, etc.
14. Give Bank reference.
00420-2
15. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any
other information that may be required by the OWNER?
16. Give bonding agent and limit.
17. If subcontractor is to be used for this contract, state the percentage of work
anticipated to be completed by subcontractor. If subcontractor is to perform
work, a separate Statement of Bidder’s Qualifications regarding subcontractor
and the method used by the subcontractor. Refer to Section 00100.
00420-3
Qualifications shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope at the date and time listed on the Bid
Proposal.
(Name of Bidder)
By:
Title:
State of
County of
being duly sworn deposes and says that he is
of
and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 .
Notary Public
My Commission expires
, 20 .
END OF SECTION 00420
00480-1
SECTION 00480
NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
State of §
§
County of §
, of lawful age, being first duly sworn, says that (he/she) is the
agent authorized by the Bidder to submit the attached Bid.
Affiant further states that the Bidder has not been a party to any collusion among Bidders in
the restraint of freedom of competition by agreement to bid at a fixed price or to refrain from bidding; or
with any official or employee of the Owner as to quantity, quality, or price in the prospective Contract, or
any other terms of said prospective Contract; or, in any discussion between Bidders and any official of the
Owner concerning exchange of money or other thing of value for special consideration in the letting of a
Contract.
Bidder’s Authorized Agent
Name of Bidder’s Firm
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, this day of , 20 .
Notary Public
My Commission expires
, 20 .
00500-1
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the th day of in the year
by and between ARKANSAS TECH UNIVERSITY (hereinafter called OWNER) and
(hereinafter called CONTRACTOR).
1. The CONTRACTOR shall commence and complete all Work as specified or indicated in the
Contract Documents. The WORK is generally described as follows:
CRABAUGH HALL HVAC RENOVATION,
CONSISTING OF:
• Mobilization;
• Coordination of delivery and storage of owner-furnished equipment;
• Demolition and removal of existing equipment;
• Replacement of equipment; and
• Other miscellaneous work related thereto.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other
services necessary for the completion of the WORK described herein.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall commence the WORK required by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
on or before a date to be specified in the NOTICE TO PROCEED and completed and ready for
final payment as specified in the Bid Form. The CONTRACTOR shall pay the OWNER, as
liquidated damages, the sum specified in the Bid Form for each calendar day thereafter that
WORK is not complete.
4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to perform all of the WORK described in the CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS and comply with the terms therein as shown in the BID PROPOSAL.
5. The term CONTRACT DOCUMENTS shall mean and include the following:
5.1 Invitation to Bid
5.2 Information for Bidders
00500-2
5.3 Supplemental Information for Bidders (where applicable)
5.4 Bid Proposal
5.5 Bid Bond
5.6 Agreement Between Owner and Contractor
5.7 Performance and Payment Bond
5.8 Contractor’s Act of Assurance Form (where applicable)
5.9 MBE/WBE Compliance Evaluation Form (where applicable)
5.10 General Conditions
5.11 Supplemental Conditions – RLF (where applicable)
5.12 Supplementary Conditions
5.13 Prevailing Wage Rates
5.14 Notice of Award
5.15 Notice to Proceed
5.16 Project Specifications
5.17 Drawings Consisting of a Cover Sheet and Drawings
5.18 Addenda numbers (to be issued if necessary).
5.19 Change Orders (to be issued if necessary).
6. The Owner shall pay the CONTRACTOR in the manner and at such times as set forth in the
General Conditions such amounts as required by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
7. The CONTRACTOR agrees to be Substantially Completed with the Item No. 1 of the Bid Form
within 130 calendar days of the effective date of the Notice to Proceed, and, if Substantial
Completion is not achieved by this date, to pay liquidated damages in the amount of $500/day for
each additional day until Substantial Completion for Item No. 1 of the Bid Form is achieved. The
CONTRACTOR agrees that the project will be completed and Ready for Final Payment within 30
calendar days after Substantial Completion of all contracted work in accordance with Article 14 of
the General Conditions.
8. This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have executed, or caused to be executed by their
duly authorized officials, this Agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed as an
original.
00500-3
OWNER CONTRACTOR
PRINTED NAME: PRINTED NAME:
BY BY
(Signature) (Signature)
(CORPORATE SEAL) (CORPORATE SEAL)
ATTEST ATTEST
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:
(If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attach
evidence of authority to sign.)
END OF SECTION 00500
00600-1
SECTION 00600
ARKANSAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
WE, as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and
as Surety, hereinafter call the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Arkansas Tech University
(Owner), for the amount of
($ ) for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their
heirs, personal representatives, and successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, and firmly by these
presents.
Principal has by written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Owner for Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation
, which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter
referred to as the Contract.
The condition of this obligation is such that if the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract on his
part and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damage which he may
suffer by reason of failure so to do and shall fully reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense
which the Owner may incur in making good any such default, and, further, that if the Principal shall pay
all persons all indebtedness for labor or materials furnished or performed under said contract failing
which such persons shall have a direct right of action against the Principal and Surety jointly and
severally under this obligation, subject to the Owner’s priority, then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
No suit, action or proceeding shall be brought on this bond outside the State of Arkansas. No suit, action
or proceeding shall be brought on this bond except by the Owner after six months from the date final
payment is made on the Contract, nor shall any suit, action or proceeding be brought by the Owner after
two years from the date on which the final payment under the Contract falls due. Any Alterations which
may be made in the terms of the contract or in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner of
any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part either of
the Owner or Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety or Sureties, or
either or any of them, their heirs, personal representatives, successors, or assigns from their liability
hereunder, notice to the Surety or Sureties of any such alteration, extension, or forbearance being hereby
waived.
00600-2
In no event shall the aggregate liability of the Surety exceed the sum set herein.
Executed on the day of , 20 .
By:
(Seal)
Principal
Witness: )
)
Attest: )
By:
(Seal)
Surety
This Bond is given in compliance with Act 351 of 1953, as amended.
END OF SECTION 00600
00640-1
SECTION 00640
WARRANTY BOND
We, , as principal (“Principal”), and
as surety (“Surety”) are hereby jointly and severally held and firmly bound unto Arkansas Tech
University, as Obligee (“Owner”), for the payment of Dollars ($
), subject to the terms and conditions provided herein.
WHEREAS, Principal executed and entered into that certain Agreement with Owner dated
, 20 (the Contract), the provisions of
which are incorporated herein by reference, and unless otherwise defined herein all defined terms used or
referred to herein shall have the meaning ascribed thereto in the Contract. In addition to other obligations
and liabilities, the Contract required Principal to perform the Work for the Project and to furnish this
Bond to Owner in compliance with Article 5 of the General Conditions and the Supplementary
Conditions.
NOW THEREFORE, the obligations of Principal and Surety herein shall remain in full force and effect as
provided herein, subject to becoming null and void upon the occurrence of either or both of the conditions
that (a) Principal shall fully perform and satisfy all obligations and liabilities of Principal under the
warranty and guarantee provisions of Sections 13.2 and 13.12 of the General Conditions, as modified or
supplemented by the Supplementary Conditions or any other applicable Contract Documents, at any time
within one year after the date of Final Acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed
therein (the “Warranty Period”), all of which includes without limitation either correcting the defective
Work, or removing and replacing it with nondefective Work, or paying all direct, indirect or
consequential costs of such correction or removal and replacement, all as provided therein, or (b) Owner
shall fail to institute a lawsuit, action or other proceeding under this Bond before the expiration of three
(3) months following the end of the Warranty Period.
FURTHER PROVIDED, that (a) any changes, modifications, amendments, alterations or
supplementations in or to the Contract, and Contract Documents or the Work, or the giving by Owner of
any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either
Owner or Principal to the other, shall not in any way release the Principal or Surety, or either of them,
from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any of the forgoing being hereby waived, (b) in no
event shall the aggregate liability of Surety exceed the amount set herein, and (c) the rights and
00640-2
obligations hereof shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of Principal, Surety, Owner and
their respective heirs, legal representatives, partners, privies, successors and assigns, provided that
nothing herein shall authorize the assignment of any such rights and obligations except upon compliance
with Section 9.2 of the Contract.
Executed on the day of , 20 .
By
(Seal)
Witness: )
)
Attest: )
(Seal)
END OF SECTION 00640
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700-1
This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or
modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the
Controlling Law.
STANDARD
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Prepared by
ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE
and
Issued and Published Jointly By
PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE
a practice division of the
NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS
___________________
AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES
___________________
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
This document has been approved and endorsed by
The Associated General Contractors of America
Construction Specifications Institute
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700-2
Copyright ©2002
National Society of Professional Engineers
1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314
American Council of Engineering Companies
1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005
American Society of Civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400
These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and
Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a
change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and
Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the
Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................. 6
1.01 Defined Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.02 Terminology ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................... 9
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ......................................................................................................... 9
2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 9
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ........................................................................................... 9
2.04 Starting the Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.05 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.06 Preconstruction Conference .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................... 9
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ...................................................................... 10
3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................................................. 10
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................................................ 10
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .............................................................................................. 11
3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 11
3.06 Electronic Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 11
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................ 11
4.01 Availability of Lands .............................................................................................................................................. 11
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 12
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................................................ 12
4.04 Underground Facilities .......................................................................................................................................... 13
4.05 Reference Points .................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ......................................................................................................... 13
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 14
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .............................................................................................................. 14
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .............................................................................................................................. 15
5.03 Certificates of Insurance ........................................................................................................................................ 15
5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................................... 15
5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................................................. 16
5.06 Property Insurance ................................................................................................................................................ 16
5.07 Waiver of Rights ..................................................................................................................................................... 17
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................................................................................... 17
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ....................................................................................... 17
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ..................................................................................... 18
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 18
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................................... 18
6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........................................................................................................................................... 18
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...................................................................................................................... 18
6.04 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................................................................. 18
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ................................................................................................................................. 19
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others............................................................................................... 20
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ...................................................................................................................................... 21
6.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
6.09 Laws and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 21
6.10 Taxes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................................................... 22
6.12 Record Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 22
6.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 22
6.14 Safety Representative ............................................................................................................................................. 23
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ........................................................................................................................ 23
6.16 Emergencies ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ................................................................................................................................. 23
6.18 Continuing the Work .............................................................................................................................................. 24
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .................................................................................................... 24
6.20 Indemnification ...................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .......................................................................................................... 25
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ......................................................................................................................... 25
7.01 Related Work at Site............................................................................................................................................... 25
7.02 Coordination .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
7.03 Legal Relationships ................................................................................................................................................ 26
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 26
8.01 Communications to Contractor .............................................................................................................................. 26
8.02 Replacement of Engineer ....................................................................................................................................... 26
8.03 Furnish Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
8.04 Pay When Due ....................................................................................................................................................... 26
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .............................................................................................................. 26
8.06 Insurance ............................................................................................................................................................... 26
8.07 Change Orders ....................................................................................................................................................... 26
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................................... 26
8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 27
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................................................ 27
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................................... 27
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 27
9.01 Owner’s Representative ......................................................................................................................................... 27
9.02 Visits to Site ........................................................................................................................................................... 27
9.03 Project Representative ........................................................................................................................................... 27
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .............................................................................................................................. 27
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................................................... 27
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..................................................................................................... 28
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................................... 28
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................................................... 28
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 28
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 28
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................................... 28
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................................... 29
10.03 Execution of Change Orders .................................................................................................................................. 29
10.04 Notification to Surety ............................................................................................................................................. 29
10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................................................... 29
ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................. 30
11.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 30
11.02 Allowances ............................................................................................................................................................. 31
11.03 Unit Price Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 31
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................................................... 32
12.01 Change of Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 32
12.02 Change of Contract Times ..................................................................................................................................... 33
12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................................... 33
ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 33
13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 33
13.02 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 33
13.03 Tests and Inspections ............................................................................................................................................. 33
13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................................................... 34
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................................................... 34
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................................. 34
13.07 Correction Period .................................................................................................................................................. 34
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................................................... 35
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work...................................................................................................................... 35
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................................. 36
14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................................................................................................................. 36
14.02 Progress Payments ................................................................................................................................................ 36
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .............................................................................................................................. 37
14.04 Substantial Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 37
14.05 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................................................. 38
14.06 Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................................................... 38
14.07 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................ 38
14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................................................... 39
14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................................................... 39
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................... 39
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................................................... 39
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ........................................................................................................................... 39
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................................................... 40
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .............................................................................................................. 40
ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................................................................................................ 41
16.01 Methods and Procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 41
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................................................... 41
17.01 Giving Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 41
17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................................................ 41
17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................................................. 41
17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................................................... 41
17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................................................... 41
17.06 Headings ................................................................................................................................................................ 41
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements
or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital
letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings
indicated which are applicable to both the singular and
plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined,
terms with initial capital letters in the Contract
Documents include references to identified articles and
paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments
issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct,
or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed
Contract Documents.
2. Agreement--The written instrument which is
evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor
covering the Work.
3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable
to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the
course of the Work in requesting progress or final
payments and which is to be accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents.
4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more
than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing
asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels
established by the United States Occupational Safety and
Health Administration.
5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder
submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the Work to be performed.
6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits
a Bid directly to Owner.
7. Bidding Documents--The Bidding
Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents
(including all Addenda).
8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or
Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of
acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any
supplements.
9. Change Order--A document recommended by
Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and
authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work
or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or
Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the
terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by
a third party is not a Claim.
11. Contract--The entire and integrated written
agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning
the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations,
representations, or agreements, whether written or oral.
12. Contract Documents-- Those items so
designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies
of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract
Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor’s
submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface
and physical conditions are not Contract Documents.
13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by
Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the
Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03
in the case of Unit Price Work).
14. Contract Times--The number of days or the
dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if
any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) com-
plete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as
evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final
payment.
15. Contractor--The individual or entity with
whom Owner has entered into the Agreement.
16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for
definition.
17. Drawings--That part of the Contract
Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which
graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the
Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and
other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so
defined.
18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date
indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which
the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the
two parties to sign and deliver.
19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as
such in the Agreement.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 7
20. Field Order--A written order issued by
Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but
which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or
the Contract Times.
21. General Requirements--Sections of Division
1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain
to all sections of the Specifications.
22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The
presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,
Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such
quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial
danger to persons or property exposed thereto in
connection with the Work.
23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous
Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of
the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as
amended from time to time.
24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-
-Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc-
es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies,
agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.
25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or
encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or
personal property.
26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the
Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple-
tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work.
27. Notice of Award--The written notice by
Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely
compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions
precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the
Agreement.
28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by
Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract
Times will commence to run and on which Contractor
shall start to perform the Work under the Contract
Documents.
29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom
Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom
the Work is to be performed.
30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls.
31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or
any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions
of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil,
petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline,
kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste
and crude oils.
32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and
maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and
duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan
to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.
33. Project--The total construction of which the
Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may
be the whole, or a part.
34. Project Manual--The bound documentary
information prepared for bidding and constructing the
Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual,
which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained
in the table(s) of contents.
35. Radioactive Material--Source, special nucle-
ar, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy
Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended
from time to time.
36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner,
employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor.
37. Resident Project Representative--The autho-
rized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to
the Site or any part thereof.
38. Samples--Physical examples of materials,
equipment, or workmanship that are representative of
some portion of the Work and which establish the
standards by which such portion of the Work will be
judged.
39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared
and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and
the time requirements to support scheduled performance
of related construction activities.
40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared
and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the
Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used
as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for
Payment.
41. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams,
illustrations, schedules, and other data or information
which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for
Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some
portion of the Work.
42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract
Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the
Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and
easements for access thereto, and such other lands
furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of
Contractor.
43. Specifications--That part of the Contract
Documents consisting of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards and
workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 8
administrative requirements and procedural matters
applicable thereto.
44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity
having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other
Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work
at the Site.
45. Substantial Completion--The time at which
the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to
the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or
a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the
Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the
purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially
complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all
or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion
thereof.
46. Successful Bidder--The Bidder submitting a
responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award.
47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the
Contract Documents which amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, suppli-
er, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to
furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the
Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor.
49. Underground Facilities--All underground
pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults,
tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and
any encasements containing such facilities, including
those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications,
cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other
liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.
50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the
basis of unit prices.
51. Work--The entire construction or the various
separately identifiable parts thereof required to be
provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes
and is the result of performing or providing all labor,
services, and documentation necessary to produce such
construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating
all materials and equipment into such construction, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
52. Work Change Directive--A written statement
to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by
Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the
Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface
or physical conditions under which the Work is to be
performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive
will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times
but is evidence that the parties expect that the change
ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will
be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order
following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if
any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times.
1.02 Terminology
A. The following words or terms are not defined
but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract
Documents, have the following meaning.
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives
1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as
allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered”, “as directed” or
terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of
professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the
adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,”
“proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or
import are used to describe an action or determination of
Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise
of professional judgment, action or determination will be
solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance
with the requirements of and information in the Contract
Documents and conformance with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or
indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a
specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any
such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be
effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to
supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to
the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of
the Contract Documents.
C. Day
1. The word “day” means a calendar day
of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
D. Defective
1. The word “defective,” when modifying the
word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty,
or deficient in that it:
a. does not conform to the Contract Documents,
or
b. does not meet the requirements of any
applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or
approval referred to in the Contract Documents,
or
c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s -
recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been
assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in
accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 9
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection
with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to
supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment
to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use
or installation and in usable or operable condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection
with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put
into use or place in final position said services, materials,
or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used
in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall
mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or
equipment complete and ready for intended use.
4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “pro-
vide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of
Contractor, “provide” is implied.
F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Docu-
ments, words or phrases which have a well-known
technical or construction industry or trade meaning are
used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such
recognized meaning.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance
A. When Contractor delivers the executed
counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall
also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be
required to furnish.
B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at
the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each
deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured
identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either
of them or any additional insured may reasonably request)
which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to
purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten
printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project
Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request
at the cost of reproduction.
2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to
Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on
the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement
or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in
the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given
at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com-
mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of
Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of
the Agreement, whichever date is earlier.
2.04 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on
the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No
Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which
the Contract Times commence to run.
2.05 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after
the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise
specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall
submit to Engineer for timely review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating
the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and
completing the various stages of the Work, including any
Milestones specified in the Contract Documents;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the
Work which includes quantities and prices of items which
when added together equal the Contract Price and subdi-
vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to
serve as the basis for progress payments during
performance of the Work. Such prices will include an
appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to
each item of Work.
2.06 Preconstruction Conference
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a
conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and
others as appropriate will be held to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work and to
discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A,
procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other
submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and
maintaining required records.
2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first
Application for Payment a conference attended by
Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be
held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided
below the schedules submitted in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10
days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete
and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be
made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are
submitted to Engineer.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 10
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to
Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work
to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance
will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the
Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or
progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve
Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be
acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable
arrangement for reviewing and processing the required
submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be
acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it
provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to
component parts of the Work.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary;
what is required by one is as binding as if required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to
describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof)
to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Docu-
ments. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or
equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the
Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade
usage as being required to produce the intended result will
be provided whether or not specifically called for at no
additional cost to Owner.
C. Clarifications and interpretations of the
Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as
provided in Article 9.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and
Regulations
1. Reference to standards, specifications,
manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization,
or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the
standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula-
tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the
Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids),
except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the
Contract Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard,
specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a
Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or
responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any
of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees
from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such
provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to
Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any
duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of
the Work or any duty or authority to undertake respon-
sibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract
Documents.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies
1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the
Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures therein and all applicable field measurements.
Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer
any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which
Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from Engineer before
proceeding with any Work affected thereby.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
During Performance of Work: If, during the performance
of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error,
ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents
or between the Contract Documents and any provision of
any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of
the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or
code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor
shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except
in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an
amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has
been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph
3.04.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or
Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambigu-
ity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known
thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated
in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract
Documents shall take precedence in resolving any
conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the
provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard, specification,
manual, code, or instruction (whether or not
specifically incorporated by reference in the
Contract Documents); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations
applicable to the performance of the Work
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 11
(unless such an interpretation of the provisions of
the Contract Documents would result in violation
of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract
Documents
A. The Contract Documents may be amended to
provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work
or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a
Change Order or a Work Change Directive.
B. The requirements of the Contract Documents
may be supplemented, and minor variations and
deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more
of the following ways:
1. A Field Order;
2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph
6.17.D.3); or
3. Engineer’s written interpretation or
clarification.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier
or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all
of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with
Contractor, shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership
rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or
other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or
bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer’s consultants,
including electronic media editions; or
2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications,
other documents, or copies thereof on extensions
of the Project or any other project without written consent
of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification
or adaption by Engineer.
B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will
survive final payment, or termination of the Contract.
Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining
copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes.
3.06 Electronic Data
A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or
Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or
Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the
printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in
electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other
types are furnished only for the convenience of the
receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained
or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s
sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic
files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern.
B. Because data stored in electronic media
format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or
otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the
party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform
acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which
the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the
data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-
day acceptance period will be corrected by the
transferring party..
C. When transferring documents in electronic
media format, the transferring party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or
readability of documents resulting from the use of
software application packages, operating systems, or
computer hardware differing from those used by the
data’s creator.
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS;
SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
4.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall
notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not
of general application but specifically related to use of the
Site with which Contractor must comply in performing
the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay
for easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are
unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in
Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor
may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall
furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal
title and legal description of the lands upon which the
Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as
necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or
construction lien against such lands in accordance with
applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional
lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 12
4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary
Conditions identify:
1. those reports of explorations and tests of
subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that
Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents;
and
2. those drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or
contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities)
that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract
Documents.
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical
Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports
and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified
in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance
on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of
their Related Entities with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings
for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences,
and procedures of construction to be employed by
Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and
information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion
drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data,
interpretations, opinions, or information.
4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsur-
face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that
is uncovered or revealed either:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any
“technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as
provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the
Contract Documents; or
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated
in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially
from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized as inherent in work of the character provided
for in the Contract Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware
thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or
physical conditions or performing any Work in connec-
tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing
about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb
such condition or perform any Work in connection
therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written
order to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written
notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will
promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the
necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or
tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing
(with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and
conclusions.
C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or
both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the
existence of such differing subsurface or physical
condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s
cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;
subject, however, to the following:
a. such condition must meet any one or more of
the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A;
and
b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit
Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price
will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs
9.07 and 11.03.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any
adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such
conditions at the time Contractor made a final
commitment to Owner with respect to Contract
Price and Contract Times by the submission of a
Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated
contract; or
b. the existence of such condition could
reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a
result of any examination, investigation, explo-
ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous
areas required by the Bidding Requirements or
Contract Documents to be conducted by or for
Contractor prior to Contractor's making such
final commitment; or
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 13
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as
required by Paragraph 4.03.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of
any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times,
or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any
of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor
for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or
anticipated project.
4.04 Underground Facilities
A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with
respect to existing Underground Facilities at or
contiguous to the Site is based on information and data
furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such
Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others.
Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Sup-
plementary Conditions:
1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible
for the accuracy or completeness of any such information
or data; and
2. the cost of all of the following will be included
in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full
responsibility for:
a. reviewing and checking all such information
and data,
b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or
indicated in the Contract Documents,
c. coordination of the Work with the owners of
such Underground Facilities, including Owner,
during construction, and
d. the safety and protection of all such Under-
ground Facilities and repairing any damage
thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Not Shown or Indicated
1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or
revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown
or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable
accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall,
promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any
Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as
required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such
Underground Facility and give written notice to that
owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will
promptly review the Underground Facility and determine
the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the
Contract Documents to reflect and document the
consequences of the existence or location of the Under-
ground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety and protection of such
Underground Facility.
2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the
Contract Documents is required, a Work Change
Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and
document such consequences. An equitable adjustment
shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, to the extent that they are attributable to the
existence or location of any Underground Facility that
was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated
with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and
that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably
have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated.
If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on
entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any
such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times,
Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05.
4.05 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to
establish reference points for construction which in
Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to
proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible
for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the
established reference points and property monuments, and
shall make no changes or relocations without the prior
written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to
Engineer whenever any reference point or property
monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and
shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or
relocation of such reference points or property
monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to
the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of
those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that
have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of
the Contract Documents.
B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical
Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general
accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports
and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified
in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance
on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or
make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of
their Related Entities with respect to:
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 14
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings
for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to,
any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences
and procedures of construction to be employed by
Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto; or
2. other data, interpretations, opinions and
information contained in such reports or shown or
indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion
drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data,
interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any
Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or re-
vealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in
Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract
Documents to be within the scope of the Work.
Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous
Environmental Condition created with any materials
brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors,
Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is
responsible.
D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous
Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for
whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous
Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately:
(i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all
Work in connection with such condition and in any area
affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer
(and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing).
Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning
the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to
evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any.
E. Contractor shall not be required to resume
Work in connection with such condition or in any affected
area until after Owner has obtained any required permits
related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice:
(i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is
or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or
(ii) specifying any special conditions under which such
Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor
cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or
extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or
Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop-
page or such special conditions under which Work is
agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may
make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
F. If after receipt of such written notice
Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on
a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to
resume such Work under such special conditions, then
Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the
area affected by such condition to be deleted from the
Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to
entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an
adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result
of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party
may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work
performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance
with Article 7.
G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless
Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the
officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them
from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous
Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous
Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated
in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the
Contract Documents to be included within the scope of
the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by
anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in
this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify
any individual or entity from and against the conse-
quences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition
created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor
is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall
obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity
from and against the consequences of that individual’s or
entity’s own negligence.
I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and
4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish performance and
payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and
payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the
Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect
until one year after the date when final payment becomes
due or until completion of the correction period specified
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 15
in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided
otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other
bonds as are required by the Contract Documents.
B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by
the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by
Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such
sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies
Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties
on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa-
nies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the
Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S.
Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent
must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent’s
authority to act.
C. If the surety on any bond furnished by
Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or
its right to do business is terminated in any state where
any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the
requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall
promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20
days after the event giving rise to such notification,
provide another bond and surety, both of which shall
comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and
5.02.
5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers
A. All bonds and insurance required by the
Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or
insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue
bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so
required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also
meet such additional requirements and qualifications as
may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.03 Certificates of Insurance
A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies
to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence
of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and
maintain.
B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies
to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence
of insurance requested by Contractor or any other
additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase
and maintain.
5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance
A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such
liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work
being performed and as will provide protection from
claims set forth below which may arise out of or result
from Contractor’s performance of the Work and
Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract
Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor,
any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable:
1. claims under workers’ compensation,
disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit
acts;
2. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s
employees;
3. claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor’s employees;
4. claims for damages insured by reasonably
available personal injury liability coverage which are sus-
tained:
a. by any person as a result of an offense directly
or indirectly related to the employment of such
person by Contractor, or
b. by any other person for any other reason;
5. claims for damages, other than to the Work
itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting
therefrom; and
6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
B. The policies of insurance required by this
Paragraph 5.04 shall:
1. with respect to insurance required by
Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include
as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion
regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and
any other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-
mentary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as addi-
tional insureds, and include coverage for the respective
officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such
additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these
additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all
claims covered thereby;
2. include at least the specific coverages and be
written for not less than the limits of liability provided in
the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or
Regulations, whichever is greater;
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 16
3. include completed operations insurance;
4. include contractual liability insurance covering
Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11
and 6.20;
5. contain a provision or endorsement that the
coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially
changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior
written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued (and the certificates of
insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to
Paragraph 5.03 will so provide);
6. remain in effect at least until final payment
and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be
correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and
7. with respect to completed operations insur-
ance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-
made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after
final payment.
a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other
additional insured identified in the Supple-
mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory
to Owner and any such additional insured of
continuation of such insurance at final payment
and one year thereafter.
5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance
A. In addition to the insurance required to be
provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at
Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s
expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect
Owner against claims which may arise from operations
under the Contract Documents.
5.06 Property Insurance
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-
mentary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain
property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the
amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to
such deductible amounts as may be provided in the
Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and
Regulations). This insurance shall:
1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals
or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions,
and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them,
each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and
shall be listed as an insured or additional insured;
2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or
open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall
at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to
the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials
and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least
the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning,
extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious
mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition
occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations,
water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such
other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically
required by the Supplementary Conditions;
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or
replacement of any insured property (including but not
limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
4. cover materials and equipment stored at the
Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by
Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided
that such materials and equipment have been included in
an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer;
5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by
Owner;
6. include testing and startup; and
7. be maintained in effect until final payment is
made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner,
Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to
each other additional insured to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued.
B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such
boiler and machinery insurance or additional property
insurance as may be required by the Supplementary
Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include
the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and
Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified
in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers,
directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is
deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as
an insured or additional insured.
C. All the policies of insurance (and the certifi-
cates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased
and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will
contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage
afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or
renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice
has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other
additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has
been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor-
dance with Paragraph 5.07.
D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing
and maintaining any property insurance specified in this
Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 17
deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple-
mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such
identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor,
Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if
any of them wishes property insurance coverage within
the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and
maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense.
E. If Contractor requests in writing that other
special insurance be included in the property insurance
policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if
possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will
be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner
shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such
other insurance has been procured by Owner.
5.07 Waiver of Rights
A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies
purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect
Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all
other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-
mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional
insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of
them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage
for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes
of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain
provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any
loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recov-
ery against any of the insureds or additional insureds
thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against
each other and their respective officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and
damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of
the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and
any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and,
in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors,
and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities
identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as
insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them) under such
policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the
above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party
making such waiver may have to the proceeds of
insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable
under any policy so issued.
B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them for:
1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use,
or other consequential loss extending beyond direct
physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work
caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other
perils whether or not insured by Owner; and
2. loss or damage to the completed Project or
part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from
fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any
property insurance maintained on the completed Project
or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization
pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion
pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment
pursuant to Paragraph 14.07.
C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner
covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred
to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any such loss,
damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no
rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or
Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees,
agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of
them.
5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the policies of
insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted
with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for
the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of
Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate
account any money so received and shall distribute it in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest
may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the
damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys
so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and
the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order .
B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the
parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days
after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this
power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary
shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with
such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no
such agreement among the parties in interest is reached,
Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the
insurers and, if required in writing by any party in
interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper
performance of such duties.
5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to
Replace
A. If either Owner or Contractor has any
objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions
of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and
maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5
on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 18
Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other
party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the
certificates (or other evidence requested) required by
Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each
provide to the other such additional information in respect
of insurance provided as the other may reasonably
request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all
of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the
Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other
party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the
start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to
any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to
any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to
obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other
party's interests at the expense of the party who was
required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order
shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly.
5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property
Insurer
A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial
Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph
14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before
the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to
Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in
writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated
thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance
shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,
but the property insurance shall not be canceled or
permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or
occupancy.
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.01 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct
the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as
may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques,
sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor
shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or
Engineer in the design or specification of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of
construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work,
Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin-
tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice
to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary
circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor’s
representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on
behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or
received from the superintendent shall be binding on
Contractor.
6.02 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably
qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and
perform construction as required by the Contract Docu-
ments. Contractor shall at all times maintain good disci-
pline and order at the Site.
B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or
protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site
or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the
Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be
performed during regular working hours. Contractor will
not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday,
Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written
consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given
after prior written notice to Engineer.
6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full
responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery,
tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone,
water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other
facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance,
testing, start-up, and completion of the Work.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into
the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be
of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents. All special warranties and
guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly
run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer,
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including
reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and
quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment shall be stored,
applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used,
cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions
of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be
provided in the Contract Documents.
6.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress
Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07
as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided
below.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 19
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for
acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07)
proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will
not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjust-
ments will comply with any provisions of the General Re-
quirements applicable thereto.
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress
Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article
12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by
a Change Order.
6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals”
A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by
using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a
particular Supplier, the specification or description is
intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and
quality required. Unless the specification or description
contains or is followed by words reading that no like,
equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is
permitted, other items of material or equipment or
material or equipment of other Suppliers may be
submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances
described below.
1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole
discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by
Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will
be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an
“or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the
proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be
accomplished without compliance with some or all of the
requirements for approval of proposed substitute items.
For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed
item of material or equipment will be considered
functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment
Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of
construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least
equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole,
3) it has a proven record of performance
and availability of responsive service; and
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and
incorporated into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to
the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and
2) it will conform substantially to the
detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
2. Substitute Items
a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of
material or equipment proposed by Contractor
does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under
Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a
proposed substitute item.
b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information
as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine that the item of material or equipment
proposed is essentially equivalent to that named
and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests
for review of proposed substitute items of
material or equipment will not be accepted by
Engineer from anyone other than Contractor.
c. The requirements for review by Engineer will
be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as
supplemented in the General Requirements and
as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the
circumstances.
d. Contractor shall make written application to
Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item
of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to
furnish or use. The application:
1) shall certify that the proposed substi-
tute item will:
a) perform adequately the functions and
achieve the results called for by the
general design,
b) be similar in substance to that
specified, and
c) be suited to the same use as that
specified;
2) will state:
a) the extent, if any, to which the use of
the proposed substitute item will preju-
dice Contractor’s achievement of
Substantial Completion on time;
b) whether or not use of the proposed
substitute item in the Work will require
a change in any of the Contract Docu-
ments (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with Owner for other
work on the Project) to adapt the design
to the proposed substitute item; and
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 20
c) whether or not incorporation or use
of the proposed substitute item in con-
nection with the Work is subject to
payment of any license fee or royalty;
3) will identify:
a) all variations of the proposed
substitute item from that specified , and
b) available engineering, sales,
maintenance, repair, and replacement
services;
4) and shall contain an itemized esti-
mate of all costs or credits that will result
directly or indirectly from use of such substitute
item, including costs of redesign and claims of
other contractors affected by any resulting
change,
B. Substitute Construction Methods or Proce-
dures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence,
or procedure of construction is expressly required by the
Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a
substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or
procedure of construction approved by Engineer.
Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow
Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that
the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly
called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements
for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided
in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be
allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each
proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A
and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish
additional data about the proposed substitute item.
Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or
equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized
until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be
evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an
approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will
advise Contractor in writing of any negative
determination.
D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require
Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special
performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any
substitute.
E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer
will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute
proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to
Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Whether or not Engineer
approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by
Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the
charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed
substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the
charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct
contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of
each proposed substitute.
F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall
provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or
“or-equal” at Contractor’s expense.
6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
Others
A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcon-
tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including
those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph
6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against
whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor
shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or
perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has
reasonable objection.
B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the
identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other
individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in
advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date
prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if
Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with
the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance
(either in writing or by failing to make written objection
thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection
in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of
any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reason-
able objection after due investigation. Contractor shall
submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and
the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the
cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of
any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti-
tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject
defective Work.
C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner
and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or
entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as
Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and
omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents:
1. shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any
contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and
any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or
entity, nor
2. shall anything in the Contract Documents
create any obligation on the part of Owner or
Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys
due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 21
or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws
and Regulations.
D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for
scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect
contract with Contractor.
E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities per-
forming or furnishing any of the Work to communicate
with Engineer through Contractor.
F. The divisions and sections of the Specifica-
tions and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcon-
tractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be
performed by any specific trade.
G. All Work performed for Contractor by a
Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appro-
priate agreement between Contractor and the
Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the
Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is
with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an
additional insured on the property insurance provided in
Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor
and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions
whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights
against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer,, and all other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary
Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds
(and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents,
consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them)
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of,
relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of
loss covered by such policies and any other property
insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any
such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed
by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain
the same.
6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and
royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work
of any invention, design, process, product, or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by
others. If a particular invention, design, process, product,
or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use
in the performance of the Work and if to the actual
knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to
patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any
license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such
rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract
Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to any infringement of patent rights or
copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the
Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of
any invention, design, process, product, or device not
specified in the Contract Documents.
6.08 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-
mentary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist
Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and
licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges
and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the
Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids,
or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the
Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners
for connections for providing permanent service to the
Work.
6.09 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by
and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applica-
ble to the performance of the Work. Except where
otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and
Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with
any Laws or Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or
having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or
Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work.
However, it shall not be Contractor’s primary
responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and
Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations,
but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s
obligations under Paragraph 3.03.
C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at
the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of
the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on
the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the
subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on
entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any
such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 22
6.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use,
and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor
in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place
of the Project which are applicable during the
performance of the Work.
6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas
1. Contractor shall confine construction equip-
ment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the
operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted
by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably
encumber the Site and other areas with construction
equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor
shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or
of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the
performance of the Work.
2. Should any claim be made by any such owner
or occupant because of the performance of the Work,
Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by
negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration
or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law.
3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner,
Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the
extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance
of the Work.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the
Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall
keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of
waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and
disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris
shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of
the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work
and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the com-
pletion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site
all tools, appliances, construction equipment and
machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to
original condition all property not designated for
alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load
nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any
manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall
Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent
property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
6.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the
Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications,
Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field
Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in
good order and annotated to show changes made during
construction. These record documents together with all
approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop
Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference.
Upon completion of the Work, these record documents,
Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi-
neer for Owner.
6.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for
initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precau-
tions and programs in connection with the Work.
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected
by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to
be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto,
including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities
not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in
the course of construction.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable
Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or
property, or to the protection of persons or property from
damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all
necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of
Underground Facilities and other utility owners when
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
relocation, and replacement of their property.
C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property
referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused,
directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor,
any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or
entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor
(except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Draw-
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 23
ings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of
Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of
them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in
part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any
Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity
directly or indirectly employed by any of them).
D. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for
safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until
such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has
issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance
with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable
(except as otherwise expressly provided in connection
with Substantial Completion).
6.14 Safety Representative
A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and
experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties
and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents
and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions
and programs.
6.15 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordi-
nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or
other hazard communication information required to be
made available to or exchanged between or among
employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or
Regulations.
6.16 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protec-
tion of persons or the Work or property at the Site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent
threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give
Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that
any significant changes in the Work or variations from the
Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are
required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a
change in the Contract Documents is required because of
the action taken by Contractor in response to such an
emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order
will be issued.
6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples
A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and
Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-
dance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as
required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be
identified as Engineer may require.
1. Shop Drawings
a. Submit number of copies specified in the
General Requirements.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be
complete with respect to quantities, dimensions,
specified performance and design criteria,
materials, and similar data to show Engineer the
services, materials, and equipment Contractor
proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to
review the information for the limited purposes
required by Paragraph 6.17.D.
2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with
the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample
submittals.
a. Submit number of Samples specified in the
Specifications.
b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material,
Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers,
the use for which intended and other data as
Engineer may require to enable Engineer to
review the submittal for the limited purposes
required by Paragraph 6.17.D.
B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required
by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals
, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review
and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole
expense and responsibility of Contractor.
C. Submittal Procedures
1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or
Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified:
a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions,
specified performance and design criteria,
installation requirements, materials, catalog
numbers, and similar information with respect
thereto;
b. the suitability of all materials with respect to
intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling,
storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to
the performance of the Work;
c. all information relative to Contractor’s
responsibilities for means, methods, techniques,
sequences, and procedures of construction, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto;
and
d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each
Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop
Drawings and Samples and with the
requirements of the Work and the Contract
Documents.
2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific
written certification that Contractor has satisfied
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 24
with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that
submittal.
3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give
Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the
Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements
of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a
written communication separate from the Shop Drawing’s
or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific
notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submit-
ted to Engineer for review and approval of each such
variation.
D. Engineer’s Review
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop
Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule
of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review
and approval will be only to determine if the items
covered by the submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, conform to the information
given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with
the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-
ments.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not
extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction (except where a particular
means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con-
struction is specifically and expressly called for by the
Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate
item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
which the item functions.
3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not
relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation
from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has complied with the requirements of
Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written
approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the
Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval
shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for
complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1.
E. Resubmittal Procedures
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by
Engineer and shall return the required number of cor-
rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required,
new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than
the corrections called for by Engineer on previous
submittals.
6.18 Continuing the Work
A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere
to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or
postponed pending resolution of any disputes or
disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or
as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner
that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract
Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its
Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation
of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee
hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance
or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub-
contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for
whom Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and
complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will
constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance
with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents:
1. observations by Engineer;
2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by
Owner of any progress or final payment;
3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial
Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto
by Owner;
4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part
thereof by Owner;
5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil-
ity by Engineer;
6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
7. any correction of defective Work by Owner.
6.20 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them from and against
all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 25
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that
any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to
bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work
itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but
only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission
of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any
of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable .
B. In any and all claims against Owner or
Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents,
officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employ-
ee (or the survivor or personal representative of such
employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall
not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount
or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by
or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or
other individual or entity under workers’ compensation
acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit
acts.
C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor
under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of
Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising
out of:
1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to
prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports,
surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or
2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to
give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or
damage.
6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Contractor will not be required to provide
professional design services unless such services are
specifically required by the Contract Documents for a
portion of the Work or unless such services are required
to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures.
Contractor shall not be required to provide professional
services in violation of applicable law.
B. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems,
materials or equipment are specifically required of
Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and
Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause
such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal
shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications,
certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals
prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other
submittals related to the Work designed or certified by
such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such
professional’s written approval when submitted to
Engineer.
C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely
upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the
services, certifications or approvals performed by such
design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have
specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy.
D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s
review and approval of design calculations and design
drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking
for conformance with performance and design criteria
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop
Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations
and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated
in Paragraph 6.17.D.1.
E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required
by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
7.01 Related Work at Site
A. Owner may perform other work related to the
Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or via other
direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by
utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con-
tract Documents, then:
1. written notice thereof will be given to
Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and
2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of
any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a
Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor
who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner
and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with
Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a
reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of such other
work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs.
Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the
Work that may be required to properly connect or
otherwise make its several parts come together and
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 26
properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall
not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or
otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter
their work with the written consent of Engineer and the
others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for
the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to
the extent that there are comparable provisions for the
benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between
Owner and such utility owners and other contractors.
C. If the proper execution or results of any part
of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by
others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such
other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any
delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that
render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper
execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s
failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such
other work as fit and proper for integration with
Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and
deficiencies in such other work.
7.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for
the performance of other work on the Project at the Site,
the following will be set forth in Supplementary Condi-
tions:
1. the individual or entity who will have
authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various contractors will be identified;
2. the specific matters to be covered by such
authority and responsibility will be itemized; and
3. the extent of such authority and responsibili-
ties will be provided.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole
authority and responsibility for such coordination.
7.03 Legal Relationships
A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable
for utilities not under the control of Owner.
B. Each other direct contract of Owner under
Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is
liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct
delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a
result of the other contractor’s actions or inactions.
C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any
other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and
disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a
result of Contractor’s action or inactions.
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General
Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to
Contractor through Engineer.
8.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. In case of termination of the employment of
Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom
Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status
under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
Engineer.
8.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data
required of Owner under the Contract Documents.
8.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor
when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and
14.07.C.
8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests
A. Owner’s duties in respect of providing lands
and easements and providing engineering surveys to
establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01
and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying
and making available to Contractor copies of reports of
explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and
drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing
surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the
Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the
Contract Documents.
8.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to
purchasing and maintaining liability and property insur-
ance are set forth in Article 5.
8.07 Change Orders
A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders
as indicated in Paragraph 10.03.
8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to certain
inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph
13.03.B.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 27
8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have
control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and
programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor
to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible
for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental
Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undis-
closed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in
Paragraph 4.06.
8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to
furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s
obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner’s
responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the
Supplementary Conditions.
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative
during the construction period. The duties and responsi-
bilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as
Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in
the Contract Documents and will not be changed without
written consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at inter-
vals appropriate to the various stages of construction as
Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an
experienced and qualified design professional the
progress that has been made and the quality of the various
aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on
information obtained during such visits and observations,
Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in
general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to
check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s
efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a
greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will
conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the
basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep
Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will
endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject
to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and
responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but
without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's
visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will
not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any
failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
9.03 Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will
furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist
Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the
Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such
Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as
provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and
limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as
provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another
representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who
is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the
responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of
such other individual or entity will be as provided in the
Supplementary Conditions.
9.04 Authorized Variations in Work
A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in
the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible
with the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-
ments. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and
will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who
shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or
Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an
adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to
or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment
, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph
10.05.
9.05 Rejecting Defective Work
A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work
which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer
believes will not produce a completed Project that
conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice
the integrity of the design concept of the completed
Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to
require special inspection or testing of the Work as
provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is
fabricated, installed, or completed.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 28
9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments
A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and
limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see
Paragraph 6.17.
B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and
limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design
drawings submitted in response to a delegation of
professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21.
C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to
Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to
Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities
and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the
Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters
before rendering a written decision thereon (by
recommendation of an Application for Payment or
otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be
final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to
reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data)
upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of
Paragraph 10.05.
9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract
Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the
requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the
acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in
question and other matters between Owner and Contractor
arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to
the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the
requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the
performance of the Work, will be referred initially to
Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise
to the question
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness,
render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner
or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them
to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times
or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05.
The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the
event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes
of Paragraph 10.05.B.
C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue
referred will be final and binding on Owner and
Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
D. When functioning as interpreter and judge
under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show
partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in
connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in
good faith in such capacity.
9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and
Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility
under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the
Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such
authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or
performance of any authority or responsibility by
Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in
contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other
individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or
have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s
means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs
incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the
performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon-
sible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts
or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing
any of the Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for
Payment and accompanying documentation and all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and
approvals, and other documentation required to be
delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine
generally that their content complies with the require-
ments of, and in the case of certificates of inspections,
tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate
compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsi-
bility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to,
the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants,
if any.
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS
10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without
notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time
to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the
Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive.
Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 29
promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be
performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree
on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an
adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or
both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change
Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Times with respect to any work performed that is not
required by the Contract Documents as amended,
modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04,
except in the case of an emergency as provided in
Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as
provided in Paragraph 13.04.B.
10.03 Execution of Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropri-
ate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering:
1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by
Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required
because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph
13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under
Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties;
2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any
undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually
performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive;
and
3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract
Times which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph
10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change
Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract
Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but
during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the
Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in
Paragraph 6.18.A.
10.04 Notification to Surety
A. If notice of any change affecting the general
scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price
or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any
bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice
will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each
applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of
any such change.
10.05 Claims
A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims,
except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be
referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by
Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any
exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies
either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents
or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims.
B. Notice: Written notice stating the general
nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to
Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but
in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event
giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a
Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice
of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data
shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to
the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event
(unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of such
Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall
be prepared in accordance with the provisions of
Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract
Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions
of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied
by claimant's written statement that the adjustment
claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant
believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The
opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and
the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s
last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time).
C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each
Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last
submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the
opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions
in writing:
1. deny the Claim in whole or in part,
2. approve the Claim, or
3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to
resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it
would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For
purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice
shall be deemed a denial.
D. In the event that Engineer does not take action
on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be
deemed denied.
E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph
10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or
10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and
Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the
dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within
30 days of such action or denial.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 30
F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price
or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in
accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES;
UNIT PRICE WORK
11.01 Cost of the Work
A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work
means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in
Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by
Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When
the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or
when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is
determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to
be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional
or incremental costs required because of the change in the
Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by
Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than
those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include
only the following items, and shall not include any of the
costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B.
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct
employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work
under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by
Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include,
without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other
personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for
employees not employed full time on the Work shall be
apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work.
Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries
and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall
include social security contributions, unemployment,
excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health
and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and
holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of
performing Work outside of regular working hours, on
Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in
the above to the extent authorized by Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished
and incorporated in the Work, including costs of
transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field
services required in connection therewith. All cash
discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner
deposits funds with Contractor with which to make pay-
ments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to
Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and
returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall
accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so
that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to
Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If
required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive
bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and
Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will
then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids,
if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that
the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the
Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work
and fee shall be determined in the same manner as
Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this
Paragraph 11.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not
limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories,
surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for
services specifically related to the Work.
5. Supplemental costs including the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation,
travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s
employees incurred in discharge of duties
connected with the Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and mainte-
nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office, and temporary
facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by
the workers, which are consumed in the perfor-
mance of the Work, and cost, less market value,
of such items used but not consumed which
remain the property of Contractor.
c. Rentals of all construction equipment and
machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented
from Contractor or others in accordance with
rental agreements approved by Owner with the
advice of Engineer, and the costs of
transportation, loading, unloading, assembly,
dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs
shall be in accordance with the terms of said
rental agreements. The rental of any such equip-
ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the
use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes
related to the Work, and for which Contractor is
liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence
of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
for whose acts any of them may be liable, and
royalty payments and fees for permits and
licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses)
caused by damage to the Work, not compensated
by insurance or otherwise, sustained by
Contractor in connection with the performance of
the Work (except losses and damages within the
deductible amounts of property insurance
established in accordance with Paragraph
5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 31
resulted from causes other than the negligence of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such
losses shall include settlements made with the
written consent and approval of Owner. No such
losses, damages, and expenses shall be included
in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of
determining Contractor’s fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary
facilities at the Site.
h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long
distance telephone calls, telephone service at the
Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in
connection with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and
insurance Contractor is required by the Contract
Documents to purchase and maintain.
B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work
shall not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of
Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of
partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers,
safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attor-
neys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting
agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other
personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or
in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general
administration of the Work and not specifically included
in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred
to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by
Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered
administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch
offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site.
3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses,
including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for
the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent
payments.
4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be
liable, including but not limited to, the correction of
defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment
wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to
property.
5. Other overhead or general expense costs of
any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and
expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B.
C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is
performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall
be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the
value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a
Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined
on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be
determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C.
D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the
Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to
Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish
and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally
accepted accounting practices and submit in a form
acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown
together with supporting data.
11.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included
in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered
to be performed for such sums and by such persons or
entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances
1. Contractor agrees that:
a. the cash allowances include the cost to
Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts)
of materials and equipment required by the
allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all
applicable taxes; and
b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling
on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit,
and other expenses contemplated for the cash
allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances, and no demand
for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
C. Contingency Allowance
1. Contractor agrees that a contingency
allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover
unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change
Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to
reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work
covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be
correspondingly adjusted.
11.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that
all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially
the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit
Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price
for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work
times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in
the Agreement.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 32
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit
Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the
purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial
Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities
and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by
Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 9.07.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an
amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover
Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately
identified item.
D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for
an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with
Paragraph 10.05 if:
1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor differs materially and signifi-
cantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated
in the Agreement; and
2. there is no corresponding adjustment with
respect any other item of Work; and
3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled
to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having
incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner
is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties
are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase
or decrease.
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE;
CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12.01 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a
Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted
by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the
other party to the Contract in accordance with the
provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
B. The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract
Price will be determined as follows:
1. where the Work involved is covered by unit
prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica-
tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items
involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or
2. where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a
mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an
allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in
accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or
3. where the Work involved is not covered by
unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph
12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work
(determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a
Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as
provided in Paragraph 12.01.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for
overhead and profit shall be determined as follows:
1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee
based on the following percentages of the various portions
of the Cost of the Work:
a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1
and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15
percent;
b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3,
the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent;
c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on
the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no
fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph
12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who
actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will
be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred
by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs
11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier
Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a
fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next
lower tier Subcontractor;
d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs
itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5,
and 11.01.B;
e. the amount of credit to be allowed by
Contractor to Owner for any change which
results in a net decrease in cost will be the
amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a
deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal
to five percent of such net decrease; and
f. when both additions and credits are involved in
any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s
fee shall be computed on the basis of the net
change in accordance with Paragraphs
12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 33
12.02 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by
a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted
by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the
other party to the Contract in accordance with the
provisions of Paragraph 10.05.
B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times
covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in
accordance with the provisions of this Article 12.
12.03 Delays
A. Where Contractor is prevented from
completing any part of the Work within the Contract
Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the
Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to
the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor
as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the
control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to,
acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners
or other contractors performing other work as contemplat-
ed by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal
weather conditions, or acts of God.
B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or
utility owners performing other work for Owner as
contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is
responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the
performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor
shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor’s
entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is
conditioned on such adjustment being essential to
Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the
Contract Times.
C If Contractor is delayed in the performance or
progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal
weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of
utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other
causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and
Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such
adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete
the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment
shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the
delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C.
D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of
each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any
claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by
Contractor on or in connection with any other project or
anticipated project.
E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an
adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays
within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to
and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall
be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor.
ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.01 Notice of Defects
A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which
Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to
Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected,
corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
13.02 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other
representatives and personnel of Owner, independent
testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with
jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the
Work at reasonable times for their observation,
inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them
proper and safe conditions for such access and advise
them of Contractor’s Site safety procedures and programs
so that they may comply therewith as applicable.
13.03 Tests and Inspections
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice
of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests,
or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services
of an independent testing laboratory to perform all
inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract
Documents except:
1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by
Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below;
2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or
inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B
shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and
3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con-
tract Documents.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body
having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an
employee or other representative of such public body,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging
and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all
costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the
required certificates of inspection or approval.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 34
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging
and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with
any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s
and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to
be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials,
mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to
Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the
Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be
performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to
be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor
without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if
requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation.
F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph
13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor
has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention
to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with
reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written
request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be
uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at
Contractor’s expense.
B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable
that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected
or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request,
shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may
require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing
all necessary labor, material, and equipment.
C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is
defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses,
and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and
testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be
entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in
Paragraph 10.05.
D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be
defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or
both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and
reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim
therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.
13.05 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to
supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way
that the completed Work will conform to the Contract
Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner
to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part
of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other
individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or
agent of any of them.
13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work
A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor
shall correct all defective Work, whether or not
fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and
replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall
pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of
or relating to such correction or removal (including but
not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
others).
B. When correcting defective Work under the
terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07,
Contractor shall take no action that would void or
otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee,
if any, on said Work.
13.07 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion (or such longer period of time as may be
prescribed by the terms of any applicable special
guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any
specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work
is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to
the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by
Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as
contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be
defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to
Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written
instructions:
1. repair such defective land or areas; or
2. correct such defective Work; or
3. if the defective Work has been rejected by
Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with
Work that is not defective, and
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 35
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and
replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others
or other land or areas resulting therefrom.
B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with
the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss
or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected
or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and
replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair
or such removal and replacement (including but not
limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of
others) will be paid by Contractor.
C. In special circumstances where a particular
item of equipment is placed in continuous service before
Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction
period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if
so provided in the Specifications .
D. Where defective Work (and damage to other
Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed
and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction
period hereunder with respect to such Work will be
extended for an additional period of one year after such
correction or removal and replacement has been
satisfactorily completed.
E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph
13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty.
The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be
construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions
of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal
and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to
Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer)
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall
pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to
Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such
defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as
to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work
to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to
this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to
Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change
Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and
Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so
accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs
after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be
paid by Contractor to Owner.
13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time
after written notice from Engineer to correct defective
Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required
by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if
Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply
with any other provision of the Contract Documents,
Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor,
correct or remedy any such deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under
this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective or remedial action,
Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the
Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and
suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take posses-
sion of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in
the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or
for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored
elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s
representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other
contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants
access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights
and remedies under this Paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the
rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be
charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be
issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner
shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract
Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of
the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses
and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of
repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of
Contractor’s defective Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension
of the Contract Times because of any delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by
Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this
Paragraph 13.09.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 36
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND
COMPLETION
14.01 Schedule of Values
A. The Schedule of Values established as provid-
ed in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress
payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica-
tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress
payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on
the number of units completed.
14.02 Progress Payments
A. Applications for Payments
1. At least 20 days before the date established in
the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more
often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to
Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out
and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as
of the date of the Application and accompanied by such
supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of
materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but
delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another
location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment
shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or
other documentation warranting that Owner has received
the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens
and evidence that the materials and equipment are
covered by appropriate property insurance or other
arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of
which must be satisfactory to Owner.
2. Beginning with the second Application for
Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of
Contractor stating that all previous progress payments
received on account of the Work have been applied on
account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
3. The amount of retainage with respect to
progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.
B. Review of Applications
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of
each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a
recommendation of payment and present the Application
to Owner or return the Application to Contractor
indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may
make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application.
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment
requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a
representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s
observations on the Site of the executed Work as an
experienced and qualified design professional and on
Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of
Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat-
ed;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor-
dance with the Contract Documents (subject to
an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole
prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the
results of any subsequent tests called for in the
Contract Documents, to a final determination of
quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work
under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other
qualifications stated in the recommendation); and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being
entitled to such payment appear to have been
fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility
to observe the Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer
will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the
quantity of the Work as it has been performed
have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect
of the Work in progress, or involved detailed
inspections of the Work beyond the responsi-
bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the
Contract Documents; or
b. that there may not be other matters or issues
between the parties that might entitle Contractor
to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle
Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s
Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor
Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including
final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or
b. for the means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
or
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s
performance of the Work, or
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or
for what purposes Contractor has used the
moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 37
e. to determine that title to any of the Work,
materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free
and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole
or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it
would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner
stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse
to recommend any such payment or, because of subse-
quently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment
recommendation previously made, to such extent as may
be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from
loss because:
a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has
been damaged, requiring correction or replace-
ment;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by
Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective
Work or complete Work in accordance with
Paragraph 13.09; or
d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the
occurrence of any of the events enumerated in
Paragraph 15.02.A.
C. Payment Becomes Due
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application
for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation,
the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions
of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be
paid by Owner to Contractor.
D. Reduction in Payment
1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full
amount recommended by Engineer because:
a. claims have been made against Owner on
account of Contractor’s performance or furnish-
ing of the Work;
b. Liens have been filed in connection with the
Work, except where Contractor has delivered a
specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the
satisfaction and discharge of such Liens;
c. there are other items entitling Owner to a
set-off against the amount recommended; or
d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence
of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs
14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph
15.02.A.
2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full
amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give
Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to
Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly
pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of
the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay
Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment
thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to Owner’s satisfaction the reasons for
such action.
3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner’s
refusal of payment was not justified, the amount
wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as
determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1.
14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title
to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any
Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the
Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of
payment free and clear of all Liens.
14.04 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work
ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner
and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is
substantially complete (except for items specifically listed
by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, ,
Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection
of the Work to determine the status of completion. If
Engineer does not consider the Work substantially
complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing
giving the reasons therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially
complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the
date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to
the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven
days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which
to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions
of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such
objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not
substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after
submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify
Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after
consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers
the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within
said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor
a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct-
ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate
as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any
objections from Owner.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 38
D. At the time of delivery of the tentative
certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will
deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommen-
dation as to division of responsibilities pending final
payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to
security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and
guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise
in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to
Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will
be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment.
E. Owner shall have the right to exclude
Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial
Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable
access to complete or correct items on the tentative list.
14.05 Partial Utilization
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the
Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially
completed part of the Work which has specifically been
identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner,
Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately
functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used
by Owner for its intended purpose without significant
interference with Contractor’s performance of the
remainder of the Work, subject to the following condi-
tions.
1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in
writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of
the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its
intended use and substantially complete. If and when
Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is
substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner
and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially
complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of
Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and
Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such
part of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-
tially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate
of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such
request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status
of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of
the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will
notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be
substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04
will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of
part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the
requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property
insurance.
14.06 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the
entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with
Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in
writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals
that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall
immediately take such measures as are necessary to
complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.
14.07 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of
Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections
identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance
and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of
inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in
Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may
make application for final payment following the
procedure for progress payments.
2. The final Application for Payment shall be
accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract
Documents, including but not limited to the
evidence of insurance required by Paragraph
5.04.B.7;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. a list of all Claims against Owner that
Contractor believes are unsettled; and
d. complete and legally effective releases or
waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights
arising out of or Liens filed in connection with
the Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens
specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full
and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and
receipts include all labor, services, material, and
equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all
payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other
indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner
or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have
been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or
Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full,
Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 39
satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any
Lien.
B. Engineer’s Review of Application and
Acceptance
1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of
the Work during construction and final inspection, and
Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment
and accompanying documentation as required by the
Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work
has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled,
Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final
Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s
recommendation of payment and present the Application
for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time
Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and
Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will
return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicat-
ing in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
payment, in which case Contractor shall make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for
Payment.
C. Payment Becomes Due
1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of
the Application for Payment and accompanying docu-
mentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less
any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s
recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated
damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
14.08 Final Completion Delayed
A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final
completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if
Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of
Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work
fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of
Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work
fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to
be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the
Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required
in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work
fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by
Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such
payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms
and conditions governing final payment, except that it
shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.
14.09 Waiver of Claims
A. The making and acceptance of final payment
will constitute:
1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against
Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens,
from defective Work appearing after final inspection
pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with
the Contract Documents or the terms of any special
guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s
continuing obligations under the Contract Documents;
and
2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against
Owner other than those previously made in accordance
with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged
by Owner in writing as still unsettled.
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION
15.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may
suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of
not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to
Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which
Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work
on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust-
ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Times, or both, directly attributable to any such
suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as
provided in Paragraph 10.05.
15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the
following events will justify termination for cause:
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
(including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient
skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or
failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established
under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time
pursuant to Paragraph 6.04);
2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations
of any public body having jurisdiction;
3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of
Engineer; or
4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way
of any provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. If one or more of the events identified in
Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving
Contractor (and surety ) seven days written notice of its
intent to terminate the services of Contractor:
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 40
1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take
possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools,
appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the
Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used
by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass
or conversion),
2. incorporate in the Work all materials and
equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid
Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and
3. complete the Work as Owner may deem
expedient.
C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph
15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any
further payment until the Work is completed. If the
unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims,
costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out
of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be
paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and
damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall
pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses,
and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by
Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so
approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order.
When exercising any rights or remedies under this
Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the
lowest price for the Work performed.
D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and
15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if
Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice
of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and
proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more
than 30 days of receipt of said notice.
E. Where Contractor’s services have been so
terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any
rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then
existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or
payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
F. If and to the extent that Contractor has
provided a performance bond under the provisions of
Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond
shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B, and
15.02.C.
15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience
A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor
and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without
prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner,
terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be
paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in
accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the
effective date of termination, including fair and
reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date
of termination in performing services and furnishing
labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract
Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus
fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such
expenses;
3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution
costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and
4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to
termination.
B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss
of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss
arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i)
the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days
by Owner or under an order of court or other public
authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application
for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii)
Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally
determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven
days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided
Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or
failure within that time, terminate the Contract and
recover from Owner payment on the same terms as
provided in Paragraph 15.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment
within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed
for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined
to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice
to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is
made of all such amounts due Contractor, including
interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04
are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a
Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for
expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s
stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph.
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 41
ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Either Owner or Contractor may request
mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a
decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision
becomes final and binding. The mediation will be
governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of
the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the
Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for
mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American
Arbitration Association and the other party to the
Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the
effect of Paragraph 10.05.E.
B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the
mediation process in good faith. The process shall be
concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date
of termination of the mediation shall be determined by
application of the mediation rules referenced above.
C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation,
Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial
pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become
final and binding 30 days after termination of the
mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or
Contractor:
1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute
resolution process provided for in the Supplementary
Conditions, or
2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim
to another dispute resolution process, or
3. gives written notice to the other party of their
intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent
jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
17.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract
Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be
deemed to have been validly given if:
1. delivered in person to the individual or to a
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for
whom it is intended, or
2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known
to the giver of the notice.
17.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the
Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If
the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or
Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the
applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the
computation.
17.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these
General Conditions and the rights and remedies available
hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are
not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any
rights and remedies available to any or all of them which
are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula-
tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of
this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated
specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with
each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to
which they apply.
17.04 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warran-
ties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in
accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all
continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Docu-
ments, will survive final payment, completion, and
acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of
the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.
17.05 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of
the state in which the Project is located.
17.06 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted
for convenience only and do not constitute parts
of these General Conditions
EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.
00700 - 42
.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
END OF SECTION
00800-1
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I – AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
Article
Number Title
1 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
6 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7 OTHER WORK
8 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9 ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10 COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
11 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES
12 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION; REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
14 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16 MISCELLANEOUS
PART II – STATE GOVERNMENT PROVISIONS
1 STATE OF ARKANSAS PROVISIONS
00800-2
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART I – AMENDMENTS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the
Construction Contract (EJCDC Document No. 1910-8, 1996 edition) and other provisions of the Contract
Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full
force and effect.
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
SC-1.01A.12.
In the third line after the word “Agreement,” insert “the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders.”
SC-1.01A.19.
Delete Paragraph 1.01.A.19 in its entirety and replace with the following:
19. ENGINEER shall mean Brown Engineers, LLC, 17200 Chenal Pkwy. Ste. 300 PMB 324, Little Rock,
AR 72223 or its designated representative.
SC-1.01A.27.
Insert the following in Paragraph 1.01A. as definition number 27. Renumber the remaining definitions to
reflect the change.
27. MODIFICATION – (a) Written Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) Field Order; (d) Work Change
Directive
SC-1.01A.45.
Insert the following at the beginning of the definition.
“The Work required by the Contract has been completed except for work having a Contract Price of less
than one percent of the then adjusted total contract price, or…”
SC-1.01A.53.
Add the following new definitions after Paragraph 1.01A.52 of the General Conditions:
53. Conditions of the Contract – The combined General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
54. Design Engineer – Same as Item 19, Engineer.
55. General Contractor – Same as Item 15, Contractor.
56. Supply Contractor – The individual or entity with whom General Contractor has entered into an
agreement to furnish, or to furnish and install, the new equipment as specified herein.
SC-1.02B.
00800-3
Delete Paragraph 1.02B of the General Conditions and replace with the following:
B. Day
1. A “calendar day” shall be a day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next
midnight, and is any day of the year, no days being exempted.
2. A “working day” shall be a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the following holidays:
New year’s Day, Presidents’ Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving
Day. And Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the
CONTRACTOR will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less
than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
SC-2.05A.
Delete Paragraph 2.05A. of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. CONTRACTOR’S Review of Construction Documents: Before undertaking each part of the Work,
CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures therein and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to
ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall
obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected
thereby. In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract
Documents which were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be
deemed to have included the most expensive in his Bid.
SC-2.05C.
Delete Paragraph 2.05C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
C. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to
OWNER, with copies to ENGINEER and each additional insured identified in the Supplementary
Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which OWNER or any additional
insured may reasonable request) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance
with Article 5.
SC-2.07A.
Amend Paragraph 2.07A. by adding the following:
Such acceptance of the contract completion schedule in no way affects the Contract Times.
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
SC-3.01A.
Amend Paragraph 3.01A by adding the following:
00800-4
The titles and headings contained in the contract documents and the subject organization are used only to
facilitate reference, and in no way define or limit the scope or intent of any of the provisions of this contract.
SC-3.01C.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 3.01C. of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
D. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract Documents
shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein,
and is through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then
upon the application of wither party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to
make such insertion.
E. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. The
Contract Documents may be altered only by a Modification.
SC – 3.03A.
Delete 3.03A. in its entirety and replace with the following:
In the event of a conflict in the Drawings, Specifications, or other portions of the Contract Documents which
were not reported prior to the Bidding of the Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have
included the most expensive in his Bid.
ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCE POINTS
SC-4.01.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.01A of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
1. If all lands and rights-of-way are not obtained as herein contemplated before construction begins.
CONTRACTOR shall begin the Work upon such land and rights-of-way as OWNER has previously
acquired.
SC-4.02.
Delete Paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
4.02 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Site of the Work
A. Bidders are advised that the plans, specifications and other documents listed in Paragraph 4.02C.
shall constitute all the information which the OWNER shall furnish. Bidders are required, prior to
submitting any proposal, to review the plans and read the specifications, proposal, contract and bond forms
carefully; to visit the site of the work; to examine carefully local conditions; to inform themselves by their
independent research, tests and investigations of the difficulties to be encountered and judge for themselves
the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing the work or time
required for its completion; and to obtain all information required to make an intelligent proposal.
00800-5
B. No information given by the OWNER or any official thereof, other than that shown on the plans and
contained in the specifications, proposals, and other contract documents, shall be binding upon the
OWNER. Bidders shall rely exclusively upon their own estimates, investigations, tests and other data which
are necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is based. Any bidder, by
submitting his bid, represent and warrants: that he has prepared his bid in accordance with the specifications,
with full knowledge and understanding of the terms and provisions thereof; that he has reviewed, studied
and examined the bid prior to the signing and submission of same; and that he was cognizant of the terms of
his proposal, verified his calculations and found them to correct and agrees to be bound thereby.
SC-4.05A.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 4.05A of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
B. ENGINEER may check the lines, elevations, reference marks, batter boards, etc., set by
CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR shall correct any errors disclosed by such check. Such a check shall
not be considered as approval of CONTRACTOR’s work and shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the
responsibility for accurate construction of the entire Work. CONTRACTOR shall furnish personnel to assist
ENGINEER in checking lines and grades.
ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
SC-5.02A.
Delete Paragraph 5.02A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by
CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized
in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and
coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements
and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
SC-5.03A.
Delete the following from Paragraph 5.03A.:
OWNER shall deliver to CONTRACTOR, with copies to each additional insured identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by
CONTRACTOR or any other additional insured) which OWNER is required to purchase and maintain.
Replace with:
Insurance certificates must be submitted and issued with the “Owner” listed as the certificate holder.
Add a new paragraph at the end of Paragraph 5.03A which reads as follows:
B. All policies shall be endorsed to read: “Said policy shall not be cancelled, nonrenewed or materially
changes without thirty (30) days advance written notice begin given to the Owner
Except when the policy is being cancelled for nonpayment of premium in which case ten (10 ) days advance
written notice is required.”
00800-6
SC-5.04B.1.
Add the following at the end of Paragraph 5.04B.1:
The following are to be listed as additional insured on all insurance policies:
Arkansas Tech University
Brown Engineers, LLC
SC-5.04.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 5.04B.7 of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
8. CONTRACTOR may purchase and maintain excess liability insurance in the umbrella form in order to
satisfy the limits of liability required for the insurance to be purchased and maintained in accordance with
Paragraph 5.04. Evidence of such excess liability shall be delivered to OWNER in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05 in the form of a certificate indicating the policy numbers and limits of liability of all
underlying insurance. The umbrella liability insurance shall have a combined single limit of not less than
$5,000,000.
SC-5.05A.
Delete Paragraph 5.05A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain a separate Owner’s Protective Liability policy, issued
to OWNER at the expense of CONTRACTOR, including OWNER and ENGINEER as named insured. This
insurance shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts:
5.05A.1 Bodily Injury $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
5.05.A.2 Property Damage $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
$2,000,000 Annual Aggregate
SC-5.06A.
Delete Paragraph 5.06A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site on a
replacement cost basis with a limit not less than 100% of the Project’s replacement value thereof (subject to
such deductible amounts as may be provided in these Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and
Regulations). This limit should include “soft cost,” or expenses relating to the construction project(s) over
and above those costs which would have been incurred if there has been no loss. These soft costs should
include, but not be limited to, interest, additional taxes, advertising/promotional expenses, additional
commissions, loss of rents, architects or engineering fees. This insurance shall:
1. Include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’s
Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in Paragraph 5.04B.1 of these
Supplementary Conditions, each of whom shall have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an
additional insured.
2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all risk” or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall
at least include insurance for physical loss and damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false
work, and Work in transit and shall insure against at least the following perils: fire, lightning,
00800-7
extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal,
demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, and such other
causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplemental Conditions;
3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not
limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects);
4. cover materials and equipment in transit to the Project site, and materials that the CONTRACTOR
has taken possession of whether stored at the Project site;
5. allow for Partial Utilization of the Work by OWNER;
6. include testing and startup; and,
7. Be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the
OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and ENGINEER with thirty (30) days’ written notice to each other
additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued.
The policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with
Paragraph 5.06A shall comply with the requirements of Paragraph 5.06C.
SC-5.06B.
Delete Paragraph 5.06B of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
B. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional
property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which
will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, ENGINEER, ENGINEER’S
Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in Paragraph 5.04B.1 of these Supplementary
Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or
additional insured.
SC-5.06C.
Amend Paragraph 5.06C by adding the following to the end of the sentence:
and will contain a waiver of subrogation by the insurance company against the OWNER and each additional
insured.
SC-5.06D.
Delete Paragraph 5.06D of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
D. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the
interest of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance may be
basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, CONTRACTOR is
fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from or connected with operations under this contract
whether or not said losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of certificates or other evidence of
insurance by the OWNER, ENGINEER, and/or other listed as additional insured in Paragraph 5.04B.1 that
in any respect do not comply with the Contract requirements does not release the CONTRACTOR from
compliance herewith.
SC-5.06E.
Delete Paragraph 5.06E of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-5.07.
00800-8
Delete Paragraph 5.07 of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-5.08A.
Delete Paragraph 5.08A of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-5.08B
Delete Paragraph 5.08B of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-5.09A.
Delete Paragraph 5.09A of the General Conditions in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
A. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the insurance
required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with this Article 5 on the
basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing
thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates to OWNER in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05. CONTRACTOR will provide such additional information in respect of insurance
provided by CONTRACTOR as OWNER may reasonably request.
ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-6.02.
Add the new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.02B of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
C. Regular working hours are defined as 8 hours per day, Monday through Friday, excluding
holidays, between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Requests to work other than regular working
hours shall be submitted to ENGINEER not less than 48 hours prior to any proposed weekend work or
scheduled extended work weeks. Occasional unscheduled overtime on weekdays may be permitted
provided two hours’ notice is given to ENGINEER.
D. CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for additional engineering and/or inspection costs
incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours stipulated in Article SC-
6.02.C. At OWNER’s option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the CONTRACTOR’s monthly
payment request or deducted from the CONTRACTOR’s retention prior to release of final payment.
Overtime costs for the OWNER’s personnel shall be based on the individual’s current overtime wage rate.
Overtime costs for personnel employed by the ENGINEER or OWNER’s independent testing laboratory
shall be calculated in accordance with the terms of their respective contracts with the OWNER.
SC-6.03.
Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.03B of the General Conditions.
C. This agreement is subject to the applicable provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act, Public Law 87-581, 87th Congress. No Contractor or Subcontractor contracting for any
part of the Work shall require or permit any laborer or mechanic to be employed on the Work in excess of
forty hours in any work week unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less
00800-9
than one and one-half times that person’s basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in
such work week.
D. CONTRACTOR shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever OWNER
shall notify CONTRACTOR in writing that any person on the Work appears to be incompetent,
disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the Project and shall not again
be employed on it except with the consent of OWNER.
E. CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors shall, insofar as practicable, give preference in the hiring of
workers for the Project to qualified local residents with first preferences being given to citizens of the
United States who have served in the armed forces of the United States and have been honorably
discharged therefrom or released from active duty therein.
SC-6.05A.
Delete Paragraph 6.05A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
6.05 Substitutes and “Or Equals”
A. Where equipment and products are specified by name, no substitutions or “or-equals” will be
considered or approved unless the term “or-equal” is included in the acceptable manufacturer section of
the Specifications.
1. If substitutions or “or-equals” are specifically permitted for consideration by the
individual Specifications, they must be submitted and will be reviewed and evaluated in
accordance with the provisions established in General Condition Paragraph 6.05 and in
Division 1 of the Specifications.
SC-6.05C.
Amend Paragraph 6.05C by deleting the third sentence and replacing it with the following:
No “or-equals” or substitutes will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER’s review is complete,
which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or Field Order.
SC-6.06.
Delete Paragraphs 6.06A and 6.06B of the General Conditions in their entirety and insert therefore the
following:
A. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
(including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials or equipment), whether initially or as a
substitute, against whom OWNER may have reasonable objection. Acceptance of any Subcontractor,
other person or organization by OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER to reject
defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or
organization against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection unless called for in the Contract
Documents.
B. Not Used.
SC-6.06G.
00800-10
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.06G of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
H. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization, to the extent practicable, information about amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance
with CONTRACTOR’s Applications for Payment on account of the particular Subcontractor’s,
Supplier’s, or other organization’s Work.
SC-6.08A.
Delete Paragraphs 6.08A of the General Conditions in their entirety and insert therefore the following:
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there
are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement.
SC-6.10A.
Add the following language at the end of Paragraph 6.10A of the General Conditions:
The OWNER qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Arkansas. The
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all statutes and ruling of the State Comptroller.
SC-6.16A.
Amend Paragraph 6.16A by revising the last sentence to read:
If ENGINEER determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility
of the CONTRACTOR and that a change to the Contract Documents is required because of the action
taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order
will be issued.
SC-6.17E.1.
Add a new sentence at the end of Paragraph 6.17.E.1 to read as follows:
Approval of Shop Drawings for equipment requiring Efficiency Guarantee Bonds will be withheld until
the receipt of such Bonds.
SC-6.17E.1.
Delete the last sentence in Paragraph 6.17E.1 and replace with the following:
All resubmittals shall be in strict compliance with the Drawings, Specifications and Contract Documents,
and only the changes permitted from the prior submittal shall be modifications of additional information
addressing specifically the ENGINEER’s previous comments.
SC-6.18A.
00800-11
Amend Paragraph 6.18A of the General Conditions by adding the following at the end of the second
sentence:
CONTRACTOR assumes and bears responsibility for all costs and time delays associated with any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
SC-6.19D.
Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.19C which is to read as follows:
Manufacturer’s Guaranty/Warranty
The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the following guarantee/warranty from the manufacturer of all
major pieces of equipment furnished and installed on this Project. Such guaranty/warranty shall be for the
benefit of OWNER and shall be furnished in writing by the manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR’s and
manufacturer’s obligations under this provision are in addition to other express or implied warranties
under the Contract Documents and under the law and in no way diminish any other right that the OWNER
may have against the CONTRACTOR or manufacturer for faulty material, equipment or work. The
warranty period shall not be interpreted as a limitation on the time in which the OWNER can enforce such
other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
The manufacturer warrants and guarantees for a period of one year from the date of Substantial
Completion, or such longer period that may be specified in the Contract Documents, that all materials
equipment furnished shall be free from flaws, defects in material and workmanship and shall be in
conformance with the Contract Documents.
SC-6.20A.2.
Delete Paragraph 6.20A.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
2. IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION
OF CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, ANY SUPPLIER, OR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR
ENTITY DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY OF THEM TO PERFORM ANY
OF THE WORK OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE.
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT CAUSED BY ANY NEGLIGENCE OR OMISSION
OF AN INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER OR WHETHER LIABILITY
IS IMPOSED UPON SUCH INDEMNIFIED PARTY BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS
REGARDLESS OF THE NEGLIGENCE OF ANY SUCH INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY. If through
the acts of neglect on the part of CONTRACTOR, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall
suffer loss or damage on the Work, CONTRACTOR shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If
such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against OWNER on account of any
damage alleged to have been sustained, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR, who shall
indemnify and save harmless OWNER against any such claims.
Article 8. OWNER’s RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-8.01.
Delete Paragraph 8.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:
00800-12
8.01 Communications to Contractor
A. OWNER will issue project communications related to the administration of the Construction
Contract through the ENGINEER.
SC-8.02A.
Delete Paragraph 8.02A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace it with the following:
A. In the case of termination of the employment of the ENGINEER, OWNER will notify the
CONTRACTOR of their intent to appoint a different engineer to the Project. CONTRACTOR may voice
any objections with regard to the OWNER’s replacement engineer within a reasonable time set by the
OWNER and OWNER will take these objections (if any) into consideration before appointing the new
engineer.
SC-8.06.
Delete Paragraph 8.06 of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-8.09A.
Amend Paragraph 8.09A of the General Conditions by adding the following at the end of the second
sentence:
Any failure or neglect on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to enforce provisions herein dealing with
supervision, control, inspection, testing or acceptance and approval of the Work shall never operate to
relieve CONTRACTOR from full compliance with the Contract Documents nor render OWNER liable to
CONTRACTOR for money damages, extensions of time or increased compensation of any kind.
SC-8.10.
Delete Paragraph 8.10 in its entirety.
ARTICLE 9 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
SC-9.01.
Delete Paragraph 9.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
9.01 Authority of ENGINEER
A. ENGINEER is the OWNER’s representative during the construction period. However, any
determination made by the ENGINEER is subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the
OWNER’s determination shall be final.
SC-9.04.
Delete Paragraph 9.04 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
9.04 Clarifications and Interpretations
00800-13
A. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations
of the requirements of the Contract Documents as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be
consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.
SC-9.05.
Delete Paragraph 9.05 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
9.05 Authorized Variations in Work
A. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are
compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the
ENGINEER in writing prior to beginning any Work addressed in a Field Order if the CONTRACOTR
does not agree that the Work involved represents no additional cost and/or time change in the Contract
Documents.
SC-9.08.
Delete Paragraph 9.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
9.08 Determination for Unit Price Work
A. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER’s
preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by
recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER’s written decision thereon is
subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the OWNER’s determination shall be final as
provided in 9.01A.
SC-9.09
Delete Paragraph 9.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
9.09 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and
judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the
acceptability of the Work, the quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work, the interpretation of the
requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, and Claims seeking
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing, in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05, with a request for a forma decision. ENGINEER’s
formal decision thereon is subject to the review and approval of the OWNER and the OWNER’s
determination shall be final as provided by Paragraph 9.01A.
B. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to this Paragraph 9.09 and the review and
final decision by OWNER thereof, with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any
which have been waived by the acceptance of final payment as provided in Paragraph 14.07) will be a
condition precedent to any exercise by CONTRACOTR of any rights or remedies it may otherwise have
00800-14
under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect to any such claim, dispute or other
matter.
SC-10.05.
Delete Paragraph 10.05 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
10.05 Claims and Disputes
A. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, dispute, or other matter shall be
delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 7 days) after the start of the
event giving rise thereto. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, dispute, or other matter with
supporting data shall be delivered to ENGINEER within 30 days after the start of such event (unless
ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of
such Claim, dispute, or other matter). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall
be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by
claimant’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant
believes it is entitled as a result of said event.
B. ENGINEER will issue a written recommendation to the Owner in writing within 30 days after
receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.
C. If ENGINEER does not issue a written recommendation within the time stated in Paragraph
10.05.B, a decision denying the Claim in its entirety shall be deemed to have been issued 31 days after
receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any.
D. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if
not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05.
ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; CASH ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
SC-11.01A.
Amend Paragraph 11.01A of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the third
sentence: “those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall
not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01B.” and adding the following:
“those paid for the Work included in the Contract Price, shall include only the following items, and
shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01B. CONTRACTOR shall provide certified
payroll records listing personnel classifications and salaries for all individuals involved in additional
Work. Salaries for those not included in the certified payroll will be considered as being compensated
under Paragraph 11.01B.”
SC-11.01A.1.
Amend Paragraph 11.01A.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the second
sentence: “without limitation superintendents, foreman” and adding the following:
“one foreman (unless agreed upon prior to beginning Work).”
00800-15
Amend Paragraph 11.01A of the General Conditions by striking out the following words in the last
sentence: “Be included in the above” and adding the following:
“not exceed 1.5 times regular pay and shall be included in the above”
SC-11.01B.1.
Amend Paragraph 11.01.B.1 by adding the following to the list of excluded personnel in the first
sentence:
Superintendents
SC-11.01D.
Amend Paragraph 11.01D by modifying the sentence to read as follows:
“…and submit in a form and at intervals acceptable to ENGINEER…”
SC-11.02.
Delete Paragraphs 11.02A and 11.02B of the General Conditions in their entirety.
SC-11.03.
Delete Paragraph 11.03C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
C. The unit price of an item of Unit Price Work shall be subject to reevaluation and adjustment in
accordance with Paragraph 10.05 under the following conditions:
1. If the total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the
Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work
performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of such
item indicated in the Agreement; and,
2. If there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and,
3. If CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result
thereof; or if OWNER believes that the quantity variation entitles OWNER to an adjustment in
the unit price, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 11.01 if the parties are unable to agree as to the
effect of any such variation in the quantity of the Unit Price Work.
SC-11.03
Add new paragraph following Paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions which is to read as follows:
11.04 No Claims for Delays
A. The CONTRACTOR agrees to make no claims for damage for delay in the performance of the
Contract occasioned by any act or omission to act of the OWNER, ENGINEER, or any of the
ENGINEER’s or OWNER’s a gents, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated by an
00800-16
extension of time, as set forth in a Change Order, to complete performance of the Work as provided
herein.
ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
SC-12.01A.
Delete Paragraph 12.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. The Contract Price may only be changes by a Change Order or Written Amendment. Any
claim by CONTRACTOR for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be in writing to the ENGINEER
and will be processed in accordance with Article 10 hereof.
SC-12.01B.2.
Delete Paragraph 12.01B.2 of the General Conditions in its entirety.
SC-12.02A.
Delete Paragraph 12.02A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or Written
Amendment which shall be processed in accordance with Article 10 hereof.
ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
13.04 Uncovering Work
A. If any Work in covered contrary to the request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by
ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense.
B. In circumstances different from 13.04A above, if ENGINEER considers it necessary or
advisable that covered Work be observed by the ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others,
CONTRACTOR at ENGINEER’s request shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for
observation, inspection, or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective,
CONTRACTOR shall pay all Claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection,
and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of
repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitles to an appropriate decrease in the
Contract Price.
SC-13.05.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.05A of the General Conditions to read as follows:
1. If OWNER stops Work under Paragraph 13.05A, CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no extension of
Contract Time or increase in Contract Price.
00800-17
SC-13.07A.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 13.07A of the General Conditions to read as follows:
When early acceptance of a Substantially Completed portion of Work is accomplished in the manner
indicated, the correction period for that portion of the Work shall commence at the time of substantial
completion of that Work.
SC-13.08A.
Delete Paragraph 13.08A of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work,
OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment, ENGINEER) prefers to accept
it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but
not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court
or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to OWNER’s evaluation of an determination
to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness) and the
diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this
sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER’s recommendation of final payment, a
Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with
respect to the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price,
reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted.
SC-13.09C.
Delete Paragraph 13.09C of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
C. All Claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professional and all court or arbitration of other dispute
resolution costs) incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising the rights and remedies under this
Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against CONTRACTOR, and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER
shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages
will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work by others destroyed or
damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of CONTRACTOR’s defective Work.
ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
SC-14.02A.3.
Delete Paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be five percent (5%) of
the total amount of completed Work and properly stored materials on hand. In addition to the amount
retained above, the OWNER may retain additional amounts as set forth elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.02A.3 of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
00800-18
4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish evidence that payment received on the basis of materials
and equipment not incorporated and suitably stored has in fact been paid to the respective supplier(s)
within sixty days of payment by OWNER. Failure to provide such evidence of payment may result in the
withdrawal of previous approval(s) and removal of the cost of related materials and equipment from the
next submitted Application of Payment.
SC-14.02C.1.
Amend Paragraph 14.02C.1 of the General Conditions by striking out the word “Ten” and inserting the
word “thirty” in its place, and as so amended, Paragraph 14.02C.1 remains in effect.
Add four new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.02C.1 of the General Conditions which are to
read as follows:
2. Should Contractor neglect to pay any undisputed claims made in writing to OWNER
within thirty days after completion of the Work, but continuing unsatisfied for a period of ninety days,
OWNER may pay such claim and deduct the amount thereof from the balance due CONTRACTOR.
OWNER may also, with the written consent of CONTRACTOR, use any monies retained, due, or to
become due under this Contract for the purpose of paying for both labor and materials for the Work, for
which claims have not been filed.
3. Security is provided both by the Payment Bond and the power of OWNER to retain any
monies for its claims, but payment by one shall in no way impair or discharge the liability of the other.
4. Any and all items for work and materials may be paid off by OWNER within a
reasonable time after filing for record in accordance with State and local laws, a notice of such liens
except where the claim on which the lien is filed is being litigated by CONTRACTOR, and in such case
OWNER may pay the amount of any final judgment or decree or any such claim within a reasonable time
after such final judgment or decree shall be rendered.
5. All monies paid by OWNER in settlement of liens as aforesaid, with the costs and
expenses incurred by OWNER in connection therewith, shall be charged to CONTRACTOR, shall bear
interest at the rate of three percentage points above the rediscount rate then charged by the Federal
Reserve Bank, and shall be deducted from the next payment due CONTRACTOR under the terms of this
Contract.
SC-14.02D.1.
Delete Paragraph 14.02D.1. d. Add new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.02D.1.C of the
General Conditions which are to read as follows:
d. Owner has been notified of CONTRACTOR’s failure to make payments to
Subcontractors or Suppliers or for labor;
e. CONTRACTOR’s failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by
GC-6.12;
f. CONTRACTOR’s failure to submit monthly progress schedule updates or
revised schedules as requested by the OWNER or ENGINEER;
g. CONTRACTOR’s failure to provide Project photographs required by
Specifications;
00800-19
h. Unsatisfactory progress of the Work not caused by conditions beyond the
CONTRACTOR’s control;
i. CONTRACTOR’s failure to carry out instructions of the OWNER or his
representative;
j. OWNER has a reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the
balance then unpaid;
k. Damage to another contractor;
l. Claim filed by or against CONTRACTOR or reasonable evidence indicating
probable filing of claims;
m. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events
enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02B.5.a through 14.02B.5.l or Paragraph 15.02A.
SC-14.02D.3.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.02D.3 of the General Conditions which is
to read as follows:
4. OWNER may permanently withhold payment from Contract Price for
a. liquidated damages incurred by CONTRACTOR, or
b. Compensation for ENGINEER for overtime charges of Residential Project
Representative, third and subsequent reviews of submittals, review of substitutions, reinspection
fees, inspections or designs related to correction of defective Work, or other Services identified as
requiring payment by the CONTRACTOR. Compensation will be based on the following rates:
Position Hourly Rate
Principal in Charge/Project Manager $227.00
Project Engineer $190.00
Resident Project Representative $125.00
Design Engineer $125.00
Technician $120.00
Clerk $91.00
Other Direct Costs will be billed at the actual cost multiplied by 1.5
c. Costs for tests performed by the OWNER to verify that work previously tested and found
to be defective has been corrected. Verification testing is to be provided at the CONTRACTOR’s
expense to verify products or constructed works are in compliance after corrections have been
made.
SC-14.03A.
Add two new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.03A of the General Conditions which are to
read as follows:
B. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by CONTRACTOR or
Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by
which an interest is retained by the seller. CONTRACTOR warrants that CONTRACTOR has good title
00800-20
to all materials and supplies used by CONTRACTOR in the Work, free from all liens, claims or
encumbrances.
C. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save OWNER harmless from all claims growing
out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnishers
of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred
in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract.
CONTRACTOR shall at OWNER’s request furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligation of the nature
hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If CONTRACTOR fails to do so, the
OWNER may, after having served written notice to the said CONTRACTOR, either pay unpaid bills, of
which OWNER has written notice, direct, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR’s unpaid compensation a
sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory
evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to
CONTRACTOR shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the
provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon OWNER to either
CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR’s Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the CONTRACTOR,
OWNER shall be deemed the agent of CONTRACTOR and any payment so made by OWNER shall be
considered as payment made under the Contract by OWNER to CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall not
be liable to CONTRACTOR for any such payment made in good faith.
SC-14.04.
Delete Paragraph 14.04 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
14.04 Substantial Completion
A. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use,
CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially
complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that
ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Promptly thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR,
and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER
does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing
giving the reasons therefore. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will
prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of
Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or
corrected before final payment. OWNER sill thereafter review the tentative certificate of Substantial
Completion and make a final determination as to substantial completion which will be communicated to the
CONTRACTOR in writing within 20 days after receipt of the tentative certificate.
SC-14.07B.1
Delete Paragraph 14.07B.1 from the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
1. If, on the basis of ENGINEER’s observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and ENGINEER’s review of final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation,
all as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and
CONTRACTOR’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will
indicate in writing ENGINEER’s recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER
for payment. Thereupon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the
Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final
00800-21
payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and
substance, OWNER shall in accordance with the applicable State or local General Law, pay
CONTRACTOR the amount recommended the ENGINEER.
SC-14.07C.
Add a new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 14.07C of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
D. In the event the CONTRACTOR fails to attain Substantial Completion of the entire
Project (all bid items) within the Contract Time, the OWNER may withhold money permanently from the
CONTRACTOR’s total compensation a sum of $500 per day as liquidated damages and for added
expenses including engineering services, etc. The OWNER will be the sole judge as to whether the work
has been completed within the allotted time. Accordingly, it is agreed and understood that said amount is
to be assessed by the OWNER, not as a penalty, but as a predetermined and agreed upon liquidated
damage. Additionally, assessment of liquidated damages by the OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of
the OWNER’s right to sue and collect additional damages which OWNER may sustain by the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to perform in accordance with the terms of its Contract.
SC-14.08A.
Delete Paragraph 14.08 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
A. If after Substantial Completion of the Work final completion thereof is materially delayed
through no fault of the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER, upon certification
by ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, may make payment of all or a portion of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for the
Work not fully completed or corrected is less that the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds
have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the Surety to payment of the
balance due to that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the
CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER prior to certifications of such payment. Such payment, if approved, shall
be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a
waiver of claims.
SC-14.09.
Delete Paragraph 14.09 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
14.09 Waiver of Claims
A. The acceptance of final payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all
claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER.
ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
SC-15.01.
Delete Paragraph 15.,02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
15.01 Owner’s Right to Temporarily Suspend Work
00800-22
A. Reasons for Suspension. The OWNER shall have the right by written order to
temporarily suspend the Work, in whole or in part, whenever, in the judgment of the OWNER, such
temporary suspension is required:
1. in the interest of the OWNER generally;
2. due to government or judicial controls or orders which make performance of this
Contract temporarily impossible or illegal;
3. to coordinate the work of separate contractors at the job site;
4. to expedite the completion of a separate contract even thought the completion of
this particular contract may be thereby delayed;
5. because of weather conditions unsuitable for performance of the work; or
6. because the CONTRACTOR is proceeding contrary to contract provisions or has
failed to correct conditions considered unsafe for workmen.
B. The written order of the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR shall state the reasons for
suspending the Work and the anticipated periods for such suspension. Upon receipt of the OWNER’s
written order, the CONTRACTOR shall suspend the work covered by the order and shall take such means
and precautions as may be necessary to properly protect the finished and partially finished work, the
unused materials and uninstalled equipment, including the providing of suitable drainage about the work
without written direction from the ENGINEER and shall proceed with the work promptly when notified
by the ENGINEER to resume operations.
C. No additional compensation shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR for such suspension
under Paragraph 15.01A.6 above or otherwise where same is caused by the fault of the CONTRACTOR.
Where such temporary suspension is not due to the fault of the CONTRACTOR, he shall be entitled to:
1. An equitable extension of working time for the completion of the Work, not to
exceed the delay caused by such temporary suspension, as determined by the OWNER; and,
2. The actual and necessary costs of properly protecting the finished and partially
finished Work, unused materials and uninstalled equipment during the period of the ordered suspension as
determined by the OWNER as being beyond the contract requirements, such costs, is any, to be determined
on the basis set forth in Article 12 of the General Conditions; and,
3. Where the CONTRACTOR elects to move equipment from the jobsite and then
return it to the site when the Work is ordered resumed, the actual and necessary costs of these moves, in
an amount determined by the OWNER under the provisions of Article 12 of the General Conditions.
SC-15.02.
Delete Paragraph 15.02 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
15.02 Contractor Default: Owner’s Right to Suspend Work and Annul Contract
A. The Work or any portion of the Work under contract shall be suspended immediately on
written order of the OWNER declaring the CONTRACTOR to be in default. A copy of such notice shall
be served on the CONTRACTOR’s Surety. The contract may be annulled by the OWNER for any good
cause or causes, among others of which special reference is made to the following:
1. failure of the CONTRACTOR to start the Work within 10 days from the date
specified in the written work order issued by OWNER to begin the Work;
00800-23
2. substantial evidence that the progress of the work is being made by the
CONTRACTOR is insufficient to complete the Work within the specified working time;
3. failure of the CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient and proper equipment,
materials or construction forces for properly executing the Work;
4. substantial evidence that the CONTRACTOR has abandoned the work or
discontinuance of the performance of the Work or any part thereof and failure to resume performance
within a reasonable time after notice to do so;
5. substantial evidence that the CONTRACTOR has become insolvent or bankrupt,
or otherwise financially unable to carry on the Work;
6. deliberate failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to observe any requirements
of these specifications or to comply with any orders given by ENGINEER as provided for in these
specifications;
7. failure of the CONTRACTOR to promptly make good any defects in materials or
workmanship, or any defects of any nature, the correction of which has been directed in writing by the
OWNER;
8. substantial evidence of collusion or the purpose of illegally procuring a contract
or perpetrating fraud on the OWNER in the construction of Work under contract;
9. repeated and flagrant violations of safe working procedures;
10. the filing by the CONTRACTOR of litigation against the OWNER prior to final
completion of the Work.
B. When the work is suspended for any of the causes itemized above, or for any other cause
or causes, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the Work r such part thereof as the OWNER shall
designate, whereupon the Surety may either at its option assume the contract or that portion thereof which
the OWNER has ordered the CONTRACTOR to discontinue and perform the same or, with the written
consent of the OWNER, sublet the same, provided, however, that the Surety shall exercise its option
within two weeks after written notice to discontinue the work has been served upon the Contractor and
upon the surety or its authorized agents. The Surety in such event shall assume the CONTRACTOR’s
place in all respects and shall be paid by the OWNER for all work performed by it in accordance with the
terms of the contract, but in no event shall such payments exceed the contract amount, regardless of the
cost to the Surety to complete the Work
All monies remaining due to the CONTRACTOR at the time of his default shall thereupon become due
and payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to all terms of the Contract. In case the Surety
does not, within the hereinabove specified time, exercise its obligation to assume the contract or that
portion thereof which the OWNER has ordered the CONTRACTOR to discontinue, then OWNER shall
have the power to complete by contract or otherwise, as it may determine, the Work herein described or
such part thereof as it may deem necessary, and the CONTRACTOR hereto agrees that the OWNER shall
have the right to take possession of or use any or all of the materials, plant, tools, equipment, supplies and
property of every kind provided by the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of his Work and to procure other
tools, equipment and materials for the completion of the same and to charge the account of the
CONTRACTOR the expense of said contract for labor, materials, tools, equipment and expenses incident
thereto.
C. The OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest bid for the work of completing
the contract, but the expenses to be deducted shall be the actual cost of such work. In case such expense is
less than the sum which would have been payable under the contract if the same had been completed by
CONTRACTOR, then in such case the OWNER may pay the CONTRACTOR the difference in the cost,
provided that the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any claim for damages or for loss of anticipated
profits.
00800-24
D. In case such expense shall exceed the amount which would have been payable under the
contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR and his surety
shall pay the amount of the excess to the OWNER on notice from the OWNER for excess due including
any costs incurred by the OWNER, such as inspection, legal fees and liquidated damages. When any
particular part of the work is being carried on by the OWNER by contract or otherwise under the
provisions of this section, the CONTRACTOR shall continue the remainder of the work in conformity
with the terms of the contract and in such a manner as not to hinder or interfere with the performance of
workmen employed as above provided by the Owner or surety.
SC-15.03.
Delete Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions in its entirety and replace with the following:
15.03 Termination for Convenience of the Owner
A. The performance of the work under this contract may be terminated by the OWNER in
while or from time to time in part, in accordance with this section, whenever the OWNER shall determine
that such termination is in the best interest of the OWNER. Any such termination shall be effected by
mailing a notice of termination to the CONTRACTOR specifying the extent to which performance of
work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.
Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in
the United States Mail by the OWNER. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and
established that such termination is made with just cause as therein stated, and no proof in any claim,
demand, or suit shall be required of the OWNER regarding such discretionary action.
B. After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the
ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall:
1. stop work under the contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of
termination;
2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may
be necessary for completion of such portion of the work under contract as is not terminated;
3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of
work terminated by the notice of termination;
4. transfer title to the OWNER and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if
any, directed by the ENGINEER:
a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies
and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the
work terminated by the notice of termination; and,
b. the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other
property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished
to the OWNER.
5. complete performance of such part of the work as shall not have been terminated by the
notice of termination; and
6. take such action as may be necessary, or as ENGINEER may direct, for the protection
and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the
CONTRACTOR and in which the OWNER has or may acquire an interest. At a time not later
than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the
CONTRACTOR may submit to the ENGINEER a list, certified as to the quantity and quality,
of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusively of items the
disposition of which has been directed or authorized by the ENGINEER. Not later than 15
00800-25
days thereafter, the OWNER shall accept title to such items and remove them or enter into a
storage agreement covering the same, provided that the list submitted shall be subject to
verification by the ENGINEER upon removal of the items, or, if the items are stored, within 45
days from the date of submission of the list, and provided that any necessary adjustment to
correct the list as submitted shall be made prior to final settlement.
C. Within 60 days after written notice of termination, the CONTRACTOR shall submit his
termination claim to the ENGINEER in the form and with the certification prescribed by the ENGINEER.
Unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the ENGINEER upon request of the
CONTRACTOR, made in writing within such 60-day period or authorized extension thereof, any and all
such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived.
D. Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03C, the CONTRACTOR and OWNER may agree
upon the whole or any part pf the amount or amounts to be paid to the CONTRACTOR by reason of the
total or partial termination of work pursuant thereto, provided that such agreed amount or amounts shall
never exceed the total contract price as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further
reduced by the contract price of work not terminated. The contract shall be amended accordingly, and the
CONTRACTOR shall be paid the agreed amount. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits.
Nothing in Paragraph 15.03E, hereunder, prescribing the amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR in the
event of failure of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER to agree upon the whole amount to be paid to
the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination of work pursuant to this section, shall be deemed to
limit, restrict or otherwise determine or affect the amount or amounts which may be agreed upon to be
paid to the CONTRACTOR pursuant to this paragraph.
E. In the event of the failure of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER to agree, as provided in
Paragraph 15.03D, upon the whole amount to be paid to the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination
of work pursuant to this section, the OWNER shall determine, on the basis of information available to it,
the amount, if any, due the CONTRACTOR by reason of the termination and shall pay to the
CONTRACTOR the amounts determined. No amount shall be due for lost or anticipated profits.
F. In arriving at the amount due the CONTRACTOR under this section, there shall be deducted:
1. all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the
CONTRACTOR, applicable to the terminated portion of this contract;
2. any claim which the OWNER may have against the CONTRACTOR in connection with
this contract; and
3. the agreed price for or the proceeds of sale of any materials, supplies or other things kept
by the CONTRACTOR or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by
or credited to the OWNER.
G. If the termination hereunder may be partial prior to the settlement of the terminated portion of
this contract, the CONTRACTOR may file with the ENGINEER a request in writing for an equitable
adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract relating to the continued portion of the contract
(the portion not terminated by the notice of termination), and such equitable adjustment as may be agreed
upon shall be made in such price or prices; nothing contained herein, however, shall limit the right of the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid to the
CONTRACTOR for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when said contract does not
contain an established contract price for such continued portion.
H. Nothing contained in this section shall limit or alter the rights which the OWNER may have
for termination of this contract under Paragraph 15.02 hereof entitled “CONTRACTOR default”
00800-26
OWNER’s Right to Suspend Work and Annul Contract” or any other right which OWNER may have for
default or breach of contract by CONTRACTOR.
SC-15.04.
Delete Paragraph 15.04 of the General Conditions in its entirety.
ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION
SC-16.01.
Delete Paragraph 16.01 of the General Conditions in its entirety.
ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS
SC-17.01A.
Amend Paragraph 17.01A by inserting the words “return receipt requested” after the words “certified
mail” in line 6.
SC-17.02A.
Amend Paragraph 17.02A by removing “such day will be omitted from the computation” in line 6 and
replace it with “then the last day of such period shall be the next working day.”
SC-17.05.
Add a new paragraph after Paragraph 17.05 in the General Conditions which reads as follows:
B. Exclusive venue for any action under this Contract shall be a court of competent jurisdiction in
__________Pope________County, Arkansas.
Add the new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 17.05 of the General Conditions which is to read as
follows:
17.06 Addresses
A. Both the address given in the Bid Forma upon which this Agreement is founded, and
CONTRACTOR’s office at or near the site of the Work are hereby designated as places to either of which
notices, letters, and other communications to CONTRACTOR shall be certified, mailed, or delivered. The
delivering at the above named place, or depositing in a postpaid wrapper directed to the first-named place,
in any post office box regularly maintained by the post office e department, of any notice, letter or other
communication to CONTRACTOR shall be deemed sufficient service thereof upon CONTRACTOR, and
the date of said service shall be the date of such delivery or mailing. The first-named address may be
changed at any time by an instrument in writing, executed and acknowledge by CONTRACTOR, and
delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER. Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to preclude or render
inoperative the service of any notice, letter, or other communication upon CONTRACTOR personally.
17.07 Wage Rates
00800-27
A. The requirements and provisions of all applicable laws and any amendments thereof or
additions thereto as to the employment of labor, and to the schedule of minimum wage rates established in
compliance with laws, shall be a part of these Contract Documents. Copies of the wage schedules are
included in PART II of these Supplementary Conditions. If, after the Notice of Award, it becomes
necessary to employ any person in a trade or occupation not classified in the wage determinations, such
person shall be paid at not less than such rates as shall be determined by the officials administrating the
laws mentioned above. Such approved minimum rate shall be retroactive to the time of the initial
employment of such person in such trade or occupation. CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER of
CONTRACTOR’s intent to employ persons in trades or occupations not classified in sufficient time for
OWNER to obtain approved rates for such trades or occupations.
B. The schedules of wages referred to above are minimum rates only, and OWNER will not
consider any claims for additional compensation made by CONTRACTOR because of payment by
CONTRACTOR o f any wage rate in excess of the applicable rate contained in these Contract
Documents. All disputes in regard to the payment of wages in excess of these specified in the Schedules
shall be resolved by CONTRACTOR.
C. The said schedules of wages shall continue to be the minimum rates to be paid during the life of
the Agreement and a legible copy of said schedules shall be kept posted in a conspicuous place at the site
of the Work.
17.08 No Waiver of Legal Rights
A. Inspection by the ENGINEER; any order, measurement, quantity or certificate by the
ENGINEER; any order by the OWNER for payment of money; any payment for or acceptance of any
work; or any extension of time or any possession taken by the OWNER shall not operate as a waiver of
any provisions of the contract or any power therein reserved to the OWNER of any rights or damages
therein provided. Any waiver of any breach of contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or
subsequent breach. The OWNER reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any
estimate that may have been paid and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the contract
documents. The OWNER reserves the right to recover by process of law sums as may be sufficient to
correct any error or make good any deficiency in the work resulting from such error, dishonesty or
collusion by the CONTRACTOR or his agents and the ENGINEER or his assistants, discovered in the
work after the final payment has been made. Neither final acceptance of the work nor final payment shall
relieve the CONTRACTOR of responsibility fort faulty materials or workmanship, and the
CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom. Likewise, neither final acceptance nor final payment, nor partial or entire use of
occupancy of the work by the OWNER shall constitute acceptance of work not done in accordance with
the contract documents or relieve CONTRACTOR of liability with respect to any expressed or implied
warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, whether same be patently or latently
defective.
17.09 Equal Employment Opportunity
A. During the performance of this contract the CONTRACTOR agrees as follows:
1. CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age, or national origin. The CONTRACTOR shall take
affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during
employment without regard to their race, color, sex, religion, age or national origin. Such action shall
include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or
recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection
00800-28
for training, including apprenticeship. The CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places,
available to employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions
of this nondiscrimination clause.
2. CONTRACTOR shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or
on behalf of the CONTRACTOR, state that all qualified applicants shall received consideration for
employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin or age.
3. CONTRACTOR shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which
he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contact or understanding a notice to be provided,
advising the said labor union or worker’s representatives of the CONTRACTOR’s commitments under
this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and
applicants for employment.
4. CONTRACTOR shall include the provisions of this section in all subcontracts pertaining
to the work.
5. During the course of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, on a
monthly basis, a breakdown by minority group of all employees at the site of the work.
17.10 Loss of Anticipated Profits
A. Contractor will not be entitle d to loss of anticipated profits pursuant to any claim under this
Agreement.
17.11 Obligation to Perform Functions
A. Any failure or neglect on the part of OWNER, ENGINEER or inspectors to enforce provisions
herein dealing with supervision, control, inspection, testing or acceptance and approval of the work shall
never operate to relieve CONTRACTOR from full compliance with the contract documents nor render
OWNER liable to CONTRACTOR for money damages, extensions of time or increased compensation of
any kind.
PART II – STATE GOVERNMENT PROVISIONS
State Government Provisions included herein have been selected from those to which specific references
have been made elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Each and every other provision of law or clause
required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be also inserted herein in accordance
with Paragraph 3.01D of the Supplementary Conditions.
1.0 STATE OF ARKANSAS PROVISIONS
1.1 Prevailing Wage Rates (attached to end of this Section)
"General Decision Number: AR20210011 09/03/2021
Superseded General Decision Number: AR20200011
State: Arkansas
Construction Type: BuildingBUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).
County: Pope County in Arkansas.
Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wageof $10.95 for calendar year 2021 applies to all contractssubject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract isawarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractormust pay all workers in any classification listed on this wagedetermination at least $10.95 per hour (or the applicable wagerate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) forall hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year2021. If this contract is covered by the EO and aclassification considered necessary for performance of work onthe contract does not appear on this wage determination, thecontractor must pay workers in that classification at least thewage rate determined through the conformance process set forthin 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it ishigher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage ratewill be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies tothe above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by thefederal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Actitself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to theDavis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractorrequirements and worker protections under the EO is availableat www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.
Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/01/2021 1 03/12/2021 2 04/02/2021 3 07/16/2021 4 08/13/2021 5 09/03/2021
CARP0216-003 07/01/2021
Rates Fringes
SECTION 00800ADAVIS-BACON WAGE RATE DETERMINATION
00800-29
MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 27.25 11.23---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0295-010 01/01/2017
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (Includes Low Voltage Wiring)..................$ 24.55 12.23---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0624-006 01/01/2017
Rates Fringes
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Crane.......................$ 26.20 12.30 Forklift....................$ 26.20 12.30----------------------------------------------------------------* IRON0321-010 08/01/2021
Rates Fringes
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 23.00 19.61---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0424-008 07/01/2019
Rates Fringes
PAINTER (Spray)..................$ 16.10 6.97---------------------------------------------------------------- SUAR2015-008 01/09/2017
Rates Fringes
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.00 0.00 CARPENTER, Includes Drywall Hanging, and Metal Stud Installation.....................$ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.62 0.00 HVAC MECHANIC: HVAC Duct Installation.....................$ 17.27 5.03 LABORER: Common or General......$ 12.28 2.26 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 10.00 0.00 OPERATOR:
00800-30
Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 23.08 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.14 0.00 PAINTER (Brush and Roller).......$ 17.78 0.00 PLUMBER..........................$ 14.54 1.08 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 15.00 0.00----------------------------------------------------------------
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performingoperation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leavefor Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to theDavis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and anysolicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If thiscontract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provideemployees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hoursthey work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year.Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for theirown illness, injury or other health-related needs, includingpreventive care; to assist a family member (or person who islike family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has otherhealth-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasonsresulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who islike family to the employee) who is a victim of, domesticviolence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional informationon contractor requirements and worker protections under the EOis available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts.
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included withinthe scope of the classifications listed may be added afteraward only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------
The body of each wage determination lists the classificationand wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for thecited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wagedetermination. The classifications are listed in alphabeticalorder of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particularrate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local),a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate
00800-31
(weighted union average rate).
Union Rate Identifiers
A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosedin dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate wereprevailing for that classification in the survey. Example:PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier ofthe union which prevailed in the survey for thisclassification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198indicates the local union number or district council numberwhere applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number,005 in the example, is an internal number used in processingthe wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of themost current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1,2014.
Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all ratechanges in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governingthis classification and rate.
Survey Rate Identifiers
Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate thatno one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey andthe published rate is derived by computing a weighted averagerate based on all the rates reported in the survey for thatclassification. As this weighted average rate includes allrates reported in the survey, it may include both union andnon-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicatesthe rates are survey rates based on a weighted averagecalculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicatesthe State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on whichthese classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007in the example, is an internal number used in producing thewage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completiondate for the classifications and rates under that identifier.
Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until anew survey is conducted.
Union Average Rate Identifiers
Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicatethat no single majority rate prevailed for thoseclassifications; however, 100% of the data reported for theclassifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-001008/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted unionaverage rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in
00800-32
the example, is an internal number used in producing the wagedetermination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion datefor the classifications and rates under that identifier.
A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January ofeach year, to reflect a weighted average of the currentnegotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate isbased.
----------------------------------------------------------------
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This canbe:
* an existing published wage determination* a survey underlying a wage determination* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requestsfor summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and HourRegional Office for the area in which the survey was conductedbecause those Regional Offices have responsibility for theDavis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initialcontact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formalprocess described here, initial contact should be with theBranch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then aninterested party (those affected by the action) can requestreview and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
00800-33
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of theinterested party's position and by any information (wagepayment data, project description, area practice material,etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, aninterested party may appeal directly to the AdministrativeReview Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION"
00800-34
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00840-1
SECTION 00840
NOTICE OF AWARD
Dated: , 20
TO: (Bidder)
ADDRESS:
OWNER’S PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
You are notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above Project has
been accepted. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded a contract for
The Contract Price of your Contract is
Dollars
($ ).
Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice
of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you
immediately.
00840-2
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within ten (10) days of the date of this Notice
of Award, that is by:
, 20 .
1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement.
2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement three (3) fully executed copies of the Performance
and Payment Bonds.
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider
your bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited.
Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, Owner will return to you one sully
signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached.
(Owner)
BY:
(Authorized Signature)
(Title)
END OF SECTION 00840
00845-1
SECTION 00845
NOTICE TO PROCEED
Dated: , 20
TO: (Bidder)
ADDRESS:
OWNER’S PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
OWNER’s CONTRACT NO.:
CONTRACT FOR:
You are notified that the Contract Time under the above Contract will commence to run on
, 20 . By that date, you are to start performing your
obligations under the Contract Documents. In accordance with Article 3 of the Agreement, the dates of
Substantial Completion and Final Completion are , 20
and , 20 , respectively.
Before you start any Work at the site, Paragraph 2.7 of the General Conditions provides that you must
deliver to the Owner Certificates of Insurance which you are required to purchase and maintain in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
(Contractor) (Owner)
BY:
(Authorized Signature) (Authorized Signature)
(Title) (Title)
END OF SECTION 00845
01000-1
SECTION 01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. These Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. The
imperative language is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted
otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting “shall”, the
“Contractor shall”, “shall be” and similarly mandatory phrases by inference in the
same manner as they are applied to noted on the Drawings. The words “shall be:”
shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or
phrases. Except as worded to the contrary, all indicated requirements shall be
performed whether stated imperatively or otherwise.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Engineer: Brown Engineers, LLC, 17200 Chenal Pkwy. Suite 300 PMB 324,
Little Rock, AR 72223.
B. Provide: Furnish and install, complete in place, operating, testing and approved.
C. Products: The materials, systems, and equipment provided by the Contractor.
1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Prebid: Refer to Section 00100.
B. Postbid: Refer to Section 00700.
END OF SECTION 01000
01045-1
SECTION 01045
DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes the removal of existing construction to the limits as indicated
and specified. It also includes relocating existing construction as indicated and
specified. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 01310 in
scheduling and completing all demolition Work.
B. Demolition includes the complete or partial removal and turnover to Owner, salvage
or disposal of equipment and materials as indicated or specified.
C. Relocation of existing construction includes isolation, draining, cutting, joining, new
piping, new fittings, new junction boxes, new conduit, new wiring, etc. as required to
reinstall a fully functional system as indicated, as specified or as required to complete
the new Work.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for all demolition cutting, core drilling, fitting and
patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
3. Remove and replace defective Work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Provide penetrations of structural and nonstructural surfaces for installation of
piping and electrical conduit.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule: Submit proposed methods and operations of demolition, cutting and
patching in accordance with Section 01300 and Section 01310.
B. The schedule shall include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected Work.
3. The necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation, when applicable.
01045-2
4. The effect on the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, or on the
structural or weatherproof integrity of the Project.
5. Coordination schedule for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as
required.
6. Description of the proposed Work:
a. The scope and detailed sequence of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation.
b. The trades who will execute the Work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
e. Sequence and methods of removal and disposal of demolished materials.
7. Alternatives to cutting and patching, when applicable.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose Work will be affected.
C. Submit a written notice to the Owner designating the date and time the Work will
begin.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of
equipment and portions of structure s to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of
inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable.
B. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
C. Protections: Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. Conduct
operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and
persons.
1. The interior of the building and all materials and equipment shall be protected
from the weather at all times.
2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or
collapse of facilities adjacent to structures to be demolished.
3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement or
collapse of structures to be demolished.
D. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition
operations at no cost to Owner.
E. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities required to remain, keep in service, and
protect against damage during demolition operations.
01045-3
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by the Owner. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner.
2. When utility lines are encountered which are not indicated in the Drawings, the
Owner shall be notified.
F. Operating Facilities
1. Perform Work in a manner which will not disrupt the operation of existing
utilities.
2. Provide temporary services to assure uninterrupted operation of existing facilities,
except where service disruption is allowed for as specifically specified in Section
01310 or specifically noted on the Drawings.
3. Stage materials, equipment and Work in a manner which will not obstruct Owner
access to operate and maintain existing operating facility components.
4. Sequence and perform Work to minimize disruption of existing facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to
movement during demolition, cutting, patching, splicing or relocation.
B. After uncovering Work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products or
performance of the Work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Owner in writing; do not
proceed with the Work until the Owner has provided further instructions.
D. Conditions which are visible without uncovering Work shall be reported to the Owner
in writing no later than 2 weeks after site mobilization.
E. Test equipment for proper function after relocation.
F. The Contractor shall be liable for any lost or damaged items which are to be reused.
Any lost or damaged items shall be replaced with products identical to the existing
items or equivalent as determined by the Owner. The Owner shall have sole discretion
in determining what product is equivalent.
01045-4
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or
integrity of the affected portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be
exposed by demolition, cutting and patching work, and maintain excavations free from
water.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level.
Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such
as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
demolition operations, as directed by the Owner or governing authorities. Return
adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of Work as soon as practical.
3. Prior to demolition inside existing structures, provide covers consisting of plastic
sheeting and framing over existing equipment, motors, switchgear and control
panels. Maintain covers during demolition operations.
B. Structure demolition: Demolish as required and remove from Site. Use such methods as
required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations.
1. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner, from top to ground.
2. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and remove materials so as to
not expose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.
3. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other
Work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. Torch
cutting will not be permitted.
4. Where physical cutting is required, cut Work with sawing and grinding tools, not
with hammering and chopping tools. Unless otherwise specified, core drill or saw
cut openings through all concrete work. Core drilling shall be done utilizing
diamond bits. Corners shall not be over cut without prior written approval from
the Owner.
5. Torch cutting of steel members is not allowed.
01045-5
C. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or
damage to other Work.
D. Execute filling and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply
with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
E. Fit work watertight and airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations
through surfaces.
F. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Restore exposed
finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto retained
Work, adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching.
G. Take care in the removal of equipment and materials to be salvaged to prevent damage
to such.
H. The Owner is responsible for asbestos abatement. Contractor shall notify the Owner
immediately upon encountering asbestos during demolition Work.
3.04 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. The Owner will retain salvage rights to all material and equipment. All materials and
equipment retained by the Owner shall be transported and delivered to a point
designated by the Owner. All equipment to be salvaged by the Owner shall receive a
general cleaning to rid all excessive and foreign materials that may have grown
attached to the equipment.
B. Any material or equipment not retained by the Owner shall be removed from the Site
and disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with applicable regulations and laws.
END OF SECTION
01150-1
SECTION 01150
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROPOSAL
A. The Bid Form is a part of these Contract Documents and lists each item of Work for
which payment will be made. No payment will be made for items other than those
listed in the Bid Form.
B. Required items of Work and incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the
Contract which are not specifically listed in the Bid Form and which are not specified
in this Section to be measured or to be included in one of the items listed in the Bid
Form shall be considered as incidental to the Work required under this Contract, and all
costs thereof, including Contractor’s overhead costs and profit, shall be considered as
included in the prices bid for the various bid items. The Contractor shall prepare his
proposal accordingly.
C. Work includes furnishing all labor, equipment, tools, and materials, and performing all
operations required to complete the Work of this Contract satisfactorily, in place, as
specified and as indicated on the Drawings.
1.02 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit prices are requested in the Bid Form for certain items. The estimated quantities set
forth in the Bid Form for these items have been fixed for the purpose of comparison of
bids.
1.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Measurement of an item of Work will be by the unit indicated in the Bid Form. On
lump sum items, monthly progress pay quantities will be based on percentage of
acceptable project in place.
B. Unless otherwise stated in individual sections of the Specifications or on the Bid Form,
no separate payment will be made for any incidental items of Work, materials, parts,
equipment, supplies, or related items required to perform and complete the
requirements of any Bid Item. The costs for such incidentals required shall be included
in the Contract price bid for each Bid Item.
C. Payment will be made at the Contract price per unit as indicated in the Bid Form with
total price of the Contract being equal to the Total Bid, as specified and as modified, by
extending unit prices multiplied by quantities, as appropriate to reflect actual Work
01150-2
included in the Contract. Such price and payment shall constitute full compensation to
the Contractor for furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, tools, and materials, and for
performing all operations required to furnish to the Owner the entire Work of this
Contract, complete in place, as specified and as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Measurement for payment does not signify acceptance of Work.
1.04 BID ITEMS
A. Each bid item shall be as follows:
1. Bid Item 1 – All supervision, labor, materials, tools, equipment, incidentals and
related items required for construction of the Crabaugh Hall HVAC Renovation
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01200-1
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Schedule, attend, and administer as specified, preconstruction conference, periodic
progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the process of the Work.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be
qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
C. Meetings administered by Owner may be tape recorded. If recorded, tapes will be used
to prepare minutes and retained by Owner for future reference.
D. Meetings, in addition to those specified in this Section, may be held when requested by
the Owner, Engineer or Contractor.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. A preconstruction conference will be held within ten days after award of Contract and
before Work is started. The conference will be scheduled and administered by the
Construction Manager.
B. The Construction Manager will preside at the conference, prepare the minutes of the
meeting and distribute copies of same to all participant who so request by fully
completing the attendance forms to be circulated at the beginning of the conference.
C. Attendance:
1. Contractor’s project manager.
2. Contractor’s superintendent.
3. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire to
invite or the Owner may request.
4. Construction Manager.
5. Engineer’s representatives.
6. Owner’s representatives.
7. Others as appropriate.
01200-2
D. Preliminary Agenda:
Introductions
1. Schedule completion dates and Liquidated Damages.
2. Construction Scheduling, including critical path.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Authority of Contractor.
5. Authority of Construction Manager and Engineer.
6. Submittals.
7. Procedures for Change Orders, CMRs, PCMs, Field Orders, RFIs, etc.
8. Record Drawings.
9. Quality Control.
10. Safety Procedures.
11. Temporary construction facilities.
12. Use of City facilities.
13. Security and Work after Normal Hours.
14. Measurement and payment.
15. City administrative procedures, including M/WBE procedures.
16. Project Work Summary.
17. Correspondence Routing.
18. Pay Request procedures.
1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Formal project coordination meetings will be held periodically (not more than once
weekly, nor less than once monthly). Meetings will be scheduled and administered by
Construction Manager. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be
conducted on an as-needed basis. Such additional meetings shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Coordinating plant/.equipment shutdowns.
2. Installation of equipment.
01200-3
3. Start-up of equipment or plant.
4. Problem Area Resolutions.
5. Equipment approval.
B. The Construction Manager will preside at progress meetings, prepare the minutes of the
meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully
completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each meeting.
C. Attendance: Same as preconstruction conference.
D. Preliminary Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.
2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
4. Problems which impede construction schedule.
5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
6. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other
construction contracts.
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
8. Revisions to construction schedule.
9. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of schedules.
11. Review submittal schedules.
12. Maintenance of quality standards.
13. Pending changes and substitutions.
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project.
15. Review Record Documents.
16. Review monthly pay request.
17. Review status of RFIs.
01200-4
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01300-1
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable
to Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and Construction or Submittal Schedules.
Additional general submission requirements are contained in Article 6.17 of the General
Conditions. Detailed submittal requirements are specified in the technical sections.
B. All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Section Number, Paragraph,
Drawing Number or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of
sufficient size for presentation of data.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES
A. Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings as specified in individual Sections include, custom-prepared data
such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled
information, setting diagrams, actual shop work manufacturing instructions, custom
templates, special wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, individual system or
equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and
certifications, as applicable to the work.
2. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors shall be sent directly to the
Contractor for checking. The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission
at the proper time so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials.
3. Check all subcontractor's shop drawings regarding measurements, size of members,
materials and details to make sure that they conform to the intent of the Drawings
and related Sections. Return shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in
error to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof.
4. All details on shop drawings shall show clearly the relation of the various parts to
the main members and lines of the structure and where correct fabrication of the
work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and
noted on the drawings before being submitted.
5. Submittals for equipment specified under Divisions 11, and 16 shall include a
listing of all installations where identical or similar equipment has been installed
and been in operation for a period of at least one year.
01300-2
B. Product Data
1. Product data as specified in individual Sections include, standard prepared data for
manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the
manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions, availability of
colors and patterns, manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and
applicability, roughing-in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product
photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and
operational-range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports
and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and
recommended spare-parts listing and printed product warranties, as applicable to
the work.
C. Samples
1. Samples specified in individual Sections include, physical examples of the work
such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of
materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern
swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic
symbols and units of work to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent
inspection and testing, as applicable to the work.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by subcontractors,
prior to submission to determine and verify the following:
1. Equipment (or field) measurements
2. Equipment (or field) construction criteria
3. Catalog numbers and similar data
4. Conformance with related Sections
B. Each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor shall have
affixed to it the following Certification Statement including the Contractor's Company
name and signed by the Contractor: "Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby
represent that I have determined and verified all equipment (or field) measurements,
equipment (or field) construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and
similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable
approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements." Shop drawings and product
data sheets 11-in x 17-in and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and
bear the above Certification Statement on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully
describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package. Provide
01300-3
to the Resident Project Representative a copy of each transmittal sheet for shop
drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal to the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall utilize a 10-character submittal identification numbering system in
the following manner:
1. The first character shall be a D, S, P or M which represents Shop/Working Drawing
and other Product Data (D), Sample (S), Preliminary Submittal (P) or Operating/
Maintenance Manual (M).
2. The next five digits shall be the applicable Section Number.
3. The next three digits shall be the numbers 001 to 999 to sequentially number each
initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section Number.
4. The last character shall be a letter, A to Z, indicating the submission, or
resubmission of the same Drawing, i.e., "A=1st submission, B=2nd submission,
C=3rd submission, etc. A typical submittal number would be as follows:
D-03300-008-B
D. = Shop Drawing
03300 = Section for Concrete
008 = The eighth initial submittal under this section
B. = The second submission (first resubmission) of that particular shop
drawing]
D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the
submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the Engineer
shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the fulfillment of the terms of
the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor and the
Engineer will have no responsibility therefor.
F. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be
started nor shall any materials be fabricated prior to the approval or qualified approval
of such item. Fabrication performed or materials purchased accomplished which does
not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at the Contractor's risk. The
Owner will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies
required to accomplish conformity.
G. Project work, materials, and fabrication shall conform with approved shop drawings,
applicable samples, and product data.
1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
01300-4
A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence
as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor.
B. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 15 calendar days following
receipt of submittal by the Engineer. Except as noted below:
1. Contractor shall allow 30 calendar days following receipt of submittal by the
Engineer for Section 11093 and Section 16450.
C. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings: Six copies.
2. Product Data: Three copies.
3. Samples: Submit the number stated in the respective Sections.
D. Submittals shall contain:
1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2. The Project title and number.
3. Contractor identification.
4. The names of:
a. Contractor
b. Supplier
c. Manufacturer
5. Identification of the product, with the section number, page and paragraph(s).
6. Equipment (or field) dimensions, clearly identified as such.
7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Standards numbers.
9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
11. A 8-in by 3-in blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps.
01300-5
12. Where calculations are required to be submitted by the Contractor, the calculations
shall have been checked by a qualified individual other than the preparer. The
submitted calculations shall clearly show the names of the preparer and of the
checker.
1.05 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND
SAMPLES
A. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with
the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed:
1. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements;
2. as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details,
dimensions, and materials;
3. as approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise
provided herein.
B. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work
with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for
techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.
C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a
departure from the Contract requirements which Engineer finds to be in the interest of
the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Contract
Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception.
D. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes.
Code 1 - "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the
submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the
equipment and/or material for manufacture.
Code 2 - "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of
the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. The
Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however,
all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.
Code 3 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is
assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS required by
the Contractor. The Contractor may, at his own risk, release the equipment
or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be
incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall specifically
address each omission and nonconforming item that was noted.
01300-6
Confirmation is to be received by the Engineer within 10 calendar days of the
date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the confirmation.
Code 4 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is
assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a
resubmittal of the package. This resubmittal is to address all comments,
omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal is to be
received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the
Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.
Code 5 - "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent
of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package
revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to
resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract
Documents.
Code 6 - "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached
to the returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the Contractor.
Code 7 - "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED" - This code is assigned to acknowledge
receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the Engineer’s review and
approval; and, is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is
generally used in acknowledging receipt of means and methods of
construction work plan, field conformance test reports, and Health and Safety
plans.
Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing
there has been an attachment of additional data.
E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals
the Contractor shall identify all revisions made to the submittals, either in writing on the
letter of transmittal or on the shop drawings by use of revision triangles or other similar
methods. The resubmittal shall clearly respond to each comment made by the Engineer
on the previous submission. Additionally, the Contractor shall direct specific attention
to any revisions made other than the corrections requested by the Engineer on previous
submissions.
F. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge as to the
completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to the Contractor
and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The Engineer may at his
option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are
incomplete.
G. Repetitive Review
01300-7
1. Shop drawings and other submittals will be reviewed no more than twice at the
Owner's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to
the Engineer and at the Contractor's expense, based on the Engineer's then
prevailing rates. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all such fees
invoiced to the Owner by the Engineer. Submittals are required until approved.
2. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining
Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the
Contract Time.
H. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a
change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to
the Engineer at least 7 working days prior to release for manufacture.
I. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
Contractor shall carry out the manufacture of products in accordance therewith and shall
make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer.
1.06 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved product
data and samples, where required, to the job site file and elsewhere as directed by the
Engineer. Number of copies shall be as directed by the Engineer but shall not exceed
six.
1.07 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. The Contractor shall, within 15 days after the Notice to Proceed to provide and submit
to the Engineer for approval, the Schedule he plans to maintain in order to successfully
construct the work within the time allotted. The Contractor shall coordinate that
products are manufactured and delivered to the construction site so that work can be
constructed within the time allotted. The Contractor’s Schedule shall include a Critical
Path Network and a Computer generated print-out. The Schedule shall account for all
Installation Contract work in addition to the work of the Contractor. In addition to all
reasonably important construction activities, the Schedule shall provide for the proper
sequence of construction considering the various crafts, purchasing time, submittal
approval, material delivery, equipment fabrication, and similar time consuming factors.
B. The Schedule shall include as a minimum, the earliest starting and finish dates, latest
starting and finish dates, and the total float for each task or item. The Contractor shall
update (monitor) and rerun the Schedule at least monthly and shall submit to the
Engineer the Network and Computer print-out, both in duplicate, at the same time the
pay estimate is prepared. The Schedule shall contain all of the items of the Periodic
Estimate and Pay Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare schedule updates for products
specified and supplied in the Contract such that the
01300-8
C. The monthly Schedule update (monitoring) shall include the following items:
1. Network
a. Identify activities that are completed or in process by contrasting heavy lines.
Each activity worked on should be proportional to the percentage of progress
achieved to date.
b. Identify restraints imposed by material deliveries, precedent activity durations
or schedule adjustments on the monthly update of the Network.
2. Computer Print-out
a. Show the percentage progress status of each activity. The percentage progress
status will be used to support each Contractor's periodic pay estimate.
b. Show actual start and completion dates.
c. Flag all activities started and in progress.
D. Supplemental to the Critical Path Schedule, the Contractor shall provide a detailed work
schedule, projected at least a month in advance. The implementation of the work
schedule and the coordination required will constitute the basic agenda of the
coordination and planning meetings.
1.08 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER (P.E.) CERTIFICATION FORM
A. If specifically required in other related Sections, submit a State of Arkansas P.E.
Certification for each item required, in the form attached to this Section, completely
filled in and stamped.
1.09 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in
advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time
specified in the individual work of other related Sections, so that the installation will not
be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required),
coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar
sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the
Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01300-9
P.E. CERTIFICATION FORM
The undersigned hereby certifies that he/she is a professional engineer registered in the State of
Arkansas and that he/she has been employed by
______________________________________________________________________ to design
(Name of Contractor)
_____________________________________________________________________________
(Insert P.E. Responsibilities)
in accordance with Section __________________________________________________ for the
____________________________________________________________________________.
(Name of Project)
The undersigned further certifies that he/she has performed the design of the
_________________
____________________________________________________, that said design is in
conformance
Name of Project)
with all applicable local, state and federal codes, rules, and regulations, and that his/her signature
and P.E. stamp have been affixed to all calculations and drawings used in, and resulting from, the
design.
The undersigned hereby agrees to make all original design drawings and calculations available to
the
______________________________________________________________________________
(Insert Name of Owner)
or Owner's representative within seven days following written request therefor by the Owner.
___________________________________ ___________________________________
P.E. Name Contractor's Name
___________________________________ ___________________________________
Signature Signature
___________________________________ ___________________________________
Address Title
___________________________________
Address
01370-1
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Within 10 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the
Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent in triplicate a tentative schedule of values (a
breakdown of the bid) for the purpose of developing a Schedule of Values, which in
turn shall be used to determine partial pay estimates and may be used to verify costs of
credits, change orders, etc.
1. The tentative schedule of values will be reviewed by the Owner or Owner’s
Designated Agent to determine whether, in his judgment, it is sufficiently detailed
for the purpose intended. The Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent will also
evaluate the schedule to determine whether, in his judgment, the prices included
are “unbalanced” or “front-end loaded,” in an effort to inflate the prices of those
items of Work to be completed in the early stages of the Work.
2. The Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent will provide the Contractor with his
comments and may request additional information from the Contractor to justify
certain item quantities and prices. On the basis of the comments by the Owner or
Owner’s Designated Agent, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the tentative
schedule of values for further review and approval.
3. Once the tentative schedule is approved by the Owner or Owner’s Designated
Agent, it shall become the Schedule of Values to be used in determining partial
payment estimates. Twenty copies of this Schedule of Values shall be submitted
to the Owner or Owner’ Designated Agent for distribution and his use.
4. No partial payment request (including the first) will be approved until the
Schedule of Values has been approved by the Owner or Owner’s Designated
Agent.
B. In so far as possible, total quantities and unit prices shall be shown for all items of
Work, separating for each item the materials and labor and such other sub-items as the
Contractor may desire. “Lump sum,” “miscellaneous,” and other such general entries in
the schedule shall be avoided whenever possible.
C. Such items as Bond premiums, insurance, temporary facilities, and equipment storage
may be listed separately in the Schedule of Values, provided the costs can be
substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items.
D. Each item of Work that has an installed value of more than $5,000 shall be listed in the
Schedule of Values.
01370-2
E. The value for mobilization shall not exceed 3 percent of the Contract Price.
F. The sum of the prices of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the
Contract Price. No additional payment will be allowed if the quantities shown on the
Schedule of Values are less than those actually required to accomplish the Work, unless
the quantities are altered by a Change Order.
G. Each partial payment request by the Contractor shall include the approved Schedule of
Values, modified to indicate the total quantity and price of Work completed to the date
of the request.
H. The approved Schedule of Values will also be used as a guide in determining the value
of work involved in change orders.
I. It is the Owner’s intent that the Schedule of Values can also be used as a fair and
expedient method of deleting items from the Work, should the Owner so desire.
Therefore, it is the Contractor’s responsibility, as well as to his advantage, to make the
schedule as detailed and the items and their corresponding values as equitably
determined and presented as possible.
1.02 FORECASTS OF PAYMENTS
A. Within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner of
Owner’ Designated Agent a chart forecasting the monthly partial payment amounts that
are anticipated for the Project. During progress of the job, mark this chart to show
actual payments to date, revise the forecast of payments as necessary, and submit the
revised chart to the Owner or Owner’s Designated Agent monthly.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01700-1
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section outlines the procedure to be followed in closing out the Contract.
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. The Substantial Completion dates shall be established as stated in the Contract.
1.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. At the completion of work and immediately prior to final inspection, cleaning of the
entire project shall be accomplished according to the following provisions:
1. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and
equipment provided under the Contract, including finishes. The cleaning shall
leave the structures and site in a complete and finished condition to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. All Subcontractors shall similarly perform, at the same time, an equivalent
thorough cleaning of all work and equipment provided under their contracts.
3. The Contractor shall remove all temporary structures and debris, including all
dirt, sand, gravel, rubbish and waste material. See Section 01500, Temporary
Facilities.
4. Should the Contractor not remove rubbish or debris, or not clean the buildings
and site as specified above, the Owner reserves the right to have the cleaning
done at the expense of the Contractor.
B. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material
manufacturers.
D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of
sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.
E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from
sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so designated to
shine finish.
01700-2
F. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent
surfaces.
G. Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction.
H. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets. Broom clean paved
surfaces, rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
I. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop
or throw materials from heights.
J. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
1.04 FINAL INSPECTION
A. After final cleaning and restoration and upon written notice from the Contractor that the
work is completed, the Engineer will make a preliminary inspection with the Owner
and the Contractor present. Upon completion of this preliminary inspection, the
Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing, of any particulars in which this
inspection reveals that the work is defective or incomplete.
B. Upon receiving written notice from the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately
undertake the work required to remedy deficiencies and complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. When the Contractor has corrected or completed the items as listed in the Engineer’s
written notice, he shall inform the Engineer, in writing, that the required work has been
completed. Upon receipt of this notice, the Engineer, in the presence of the Owner and
the Contractor, will make his final inspection of the project.
D. Should the Engineer find all work satisfactory at the time of his inspection, the
Contractor will be allowed to make application for final payment. Should the Engineer
still find deficiencies in the work, the Engineer will inform the Contractor of the
deficiencies and will deny the Contractor’s request for final payment until such time as
the Contractor has satisfactorily completed the required work.
1.05 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all submittals have been made
and approved by the Engineer, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Final shop drawings.
01700-3
2. Project Record Documents.
3. All interface information.
4. All Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
5. All required indices and schedules.
6. All Manufacturers’ Certificates of Proper Installation.
7. All construction photographs, including those of the completed project.
8. All State required submittals.
9. Certificate that all outstanding debts are paid and that there are no liens on the
Project.
1.06 ACCESSORY ITEMS
A. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, upon acceptance of the equipment, all
special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These
special accessory items include, but are not limited to, the specified spare parts,
adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment, initial fill-
up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks, light bulbs, fuses, hydrant wrenches, valve
wrenches, valve keys, handwheels, and other expendable items as required for initial
start-up and operation of all equipment.
1.07 GUARANTEES, BONDS, AND AFFIDAVITS
A. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds,
certificates, licenses, and affidavits required for work or equipment as specified are
satisfactorily filed with the Engineer.
1.08 RELEASE OF LIENS OR CLAIMS
A. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of release
of liens has been submitted to the Owner as required by the General Condition.
1.09 FINAL PAYMENT
A. Final payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Agreement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
01700-4
END OF SECTION
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-1
SECTION 220160 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the complete natural gas system installation, within and to five (5) feet
beyond building perimeter unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings, including but not
limited to piping, regulators, unions, valves, installation, testing and other normal parts that
make the systems complete, operable, code compliant and acceptable to the authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements
and standards addressed within the following references:
D. 2015 Edition of the International Fuel Gas Code.
E. Latest Edition of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, equipment and Work shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and
local requirements and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Valves: Manufacturer’s name, size, standards compliance and pressure rating clearly
marked on outside of valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
B. Provide code and standards compliance verification, manufacturer's product data and
ratings on pipe materials, pipe fittings, regulators, valves and accessories.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
A. Accept valves on Site in shipping containers with labeling in place, inspect for damage and
store with a minimum of handling. Store plastic piping under cover out of direct sunlight.
Do not store materials directly on the ground.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-2
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work and isolating parts of completed system.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) plug valve wrench for every ten (10) plug valves sized 2 inches and
smaller, minimum of one. Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a
wrench incorporating a setscrew.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Natural gas pressures shall not exceed five (5) pounds per square inch gauge on Owner’s
side of the meter.
C. Pipe joint compound shall be lead-free, non-toxic, non-hardening, insoluble in the presence
of natural gas and compliant with ANSI/NSF 61 and Federal Specification TT-S-1732.
Temperature service range of -15 degrees F to +400 degrees F, manufactured by Hercules
“MegaLoc” or approved equal by Rectorseal, La-Co or Oatey.
2.2 PIPING
A. Buried Piping Outside of Building:
1. Polyethylene, SDR-11, ASTM D2513 pipe and fittings with heat fusion socket
joints.
2. Polyethylene pipe and fitting materials shall be compatible and by same
manufacturer to ensure uniform melting and a proper bond. Fabricated fittings shall
not be used.
3. Provide connection between buried plastic gas service piping and metallic riser in
accordance with the gas code. Provide metallic riser consisting of HDPE fused
coating on steel pipe for connection to above ground building distribution piping.
Underground horizontal metallic portion of riser shall be at least twenty four inches
in length before connecting to the plastic service pipe. An approved transition
fitting or adaptor meeting design pressure rating and plastic pipe manufacturers
recommendations shall be used where the plastic joins the metallic riser.
B. Above Ground Piping Outside of Building (Including roof):
1. Piping 2 inches and smaller shall be seamless Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM
A106 or ASTM A53 Type "S", Grade A or B, with Class 150 black malleable iron
threaded fittings conforming to ASME B16.3.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-3
2. Piping 2½ inches and larger shall be Type "S" seamless or Type "E" electric
resistance welded Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM A53, Grade A or B, with
Schedule 40 wrought carbon steel fittings, ASTM A 234 and butt weld joints.
3. Provide factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE or field
applied primer and epoxy paint coating on all pipe and fittings. Field applied
coating is restricted to fittings and short sections of pipe necessarily stripped for
threading or welding. Field coating shall be manufactured by Amercoat Type 240
or approved equal and applied in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Galvanizing shall not be considered adequate protection.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Minimum 3 inch wide polyethylene detectable type marking tape. The tape shall be
resistant to alkalis, acids and other destructive agents found in soil and impregnated with
metal so that it can be readily recognized after burial by standard locating equipment.
B. Lamination bond of one (1) layer of Minimum 0.35 mils thick aluminum foil between two
(2) layers of minimum 4.3 mils thick inert plastic film.
C. Minimum tensile strength: 63 LBS per 3 IN width.
D. Minimum elongation: 500 percent.
E. Provide continuous yellow with black letter printed message repeated every 16 to 36 inches
warning of pipe buried below (e.g.: "CAUTION GAS LINE BURIED BELOW").
F. Manufactured by Reef Industries “Terra Tape” or approved equal.
2.4 VALVES
A. All valves shall be designed, manufactured and approved for natural gas service.
B. Line Shut-off Valves sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be iron body lubricated plug valve
conforming to ASTM-A-126, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service
with threaded ends, wrench operation, rated for 200 WOG service pressure and –20 to 200
degrees F., manufactured by Resun Model R-1430, Nordstrom Model 142, or approved
equal.
C. Line Shut-off Valves sizes 2½ inches and larger shall be iron body lubricated plug valve
conforming to ASTM-A-126, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service
with flanged ends, wrench operation, rated for 200 WOG service pressure and –20 to 200
degrees F., manufactured by Resun Model R-143, Nordstrom Model 143, or approved
equal.
D. Appliance/Equipment Shut-off Valves at local connections sizes 2 inches and smaller shall
be bronze body, full port ball or butterfly type, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for
natural gas service with threaded ends, quarter turn lever handle operation, rated for 175
W.O.G. service pressure and 30 to 275 degrees F., manufactured by Nibco Model T585-70-
UL, Model T580-70-UL, Milwaukee Model BB2-100, or approved equal.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-4
E. Manual Emergency Shut-off Valves sizes 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze body, full
port ball or butterfly type, U.L. Listed and A.G.A. Approved for natural gas service with
threaded ends, quarter turn lever handle operation, rated for 175 W.O.G. service pressure
and 30 to 275 degrees F., manufactured by Nibco Model T585-70-UL, Model T580-70-UL,
Milwaukee Model BB2-100, or approved equal.
F. Automatic Emergency Shut-off Valves shall be U.L. Listed F.M. Approved for natural gas
service, 2-way electrically tripped solenoid type; fail safe closed; manual reset; Type 1
solenoid enclosure; NBR seals and disc; stainless steel core tube and springs; copper coil;
manufactured by ASCO Red Hat Series 8044, or approved equal.
2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. All pressure regulators shall be designed, manufactured and approved for natural gas
service.
B. Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall be capable of reducing distribution line
pressure to pressures required for users. Pressure relief shall be set at a lower pressure than
would cause unsafe operation of any connected user. Regulator shall have a single port with
orifice diameter no greater than that recommended by manufacturer for the maximum gas
pressure at the regulator inlet. Regulator vent valve shall be of resilient materials designed
to withstand flow conditions when pressed against valve port. Regulator shall be capable of
limiting build-up of pressure under no-flow conditions to 50 percent or less of the discharge
pressure maintained under flow conditions. Commercial grade diaphragm type with internal
relief valve, vent valve, cast iron body, Buna-N diaphragm. Manufactured by Rockwell or
Fisher.
C. Install pressure gauge adjacent to and downstream of each line pressure regulator.
2.6 UNIONS
A. Unions in 2 inches and smaller in ferrous lines shall be right and left hand nipple/coupling
assembly, or ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends, 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be ground flange unions. Companion
flanges on lines at various items of equipment, machines and pieces of apparatus may serve
as unions to permit disconnection of piping.
B. Unions connecting ferrous pipe to copper or brass pipe shall be dielectric type.
C. Above grade flexible stainless steel appliance/equipment connectors shall conform with
AGA under the ANSI Z21.69 Standard. Hose shall be braided stainless steel with a
polyolefin heat-shrink tubing with high flame-retardant qualities. Hose shall be equipped
with malleable iron unions and spring loaded brass quick-link couplings. An easily
accessible manual shut-off valve shall be installed ahead of all hose connections. Specify
T&S Brass "Safe-T-Link" or approved equal.
2.7 FLANGES
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-5
A. All 150 lb. and 300 lb. ANSI flanges shall be domestically manufactured, weld neck forged
carbon steel, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A-181 Grade I or II or A-105-71. Slip
on flanges shall not be used. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B16.9 and,
in addition, shall have the laboratory control number stenciled on each fitting for ready
reference as to physical properties and chemical composition of the material. Flanges shall
have the manufacturer’s trademark permanently identified in accordance with MSS SP-25.
Bolts used shall be carbon steel bolts with semi-finished hexagon nuts of American
Standard Heavy dimensions. Bolts shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi and an elastic
limit of 30,000 psi. Flat-faced flanges shall be required to match flanges on check valves,
strainers, and other valves and devices. Only one manufacturer of weld flanges will be
approved.
B. All flanges shall be gasketed. Contractor shall place gasket between flanges of flanged
joints. Gaskets shall fit within the bolt circle on raised face flanges and shall be full face on
flat face flanges. Gaskets shall be cut from 1/16 inch thick, non metallic, non asbestos
gasket material suitable for operating temperatures from -150 degrees F to +75 degrees F,
Klingersil C-4400, Manville Style 60 service sheet packing, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe ends and remove cutting burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove cutting oil, scale and dirt, on inside and outside of piping, before assembly.
3.2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide specified connections, shutoff valves, regulators and unions at each and every
appliance and piece of equipment requiring natural gas.
B. Provide and install union type connections at all equipment to permit removal of service
piping.
C. Gas service connections shall have a diameter at least one pipe size larger than that of the
inlet connection to the equipment as provided by the manufacturer and be of adequate size
to provide the total input demand of the connected equipment.
D. Provide listed and labeled appliance connectors complying with ANSI Z21.69 and listed for
use with food service equipment having casters, or that is otherwise subject to movement
for cleaning, and other large movable equipment. Connectors shall have listed and labeled
quick-disconnect devices and shall have retaining cables attached to structures and
equipment. Connectors shall not be concealed within or extended through wall, floor or
partition and shall be located entirely in the same room as the connected equipment.
Provide an accessible shut-off valve not less than the nominal size of the equipment
connector, immediately ahead of the connector.
E. Rigid metallic pipe and fittings shall be used at service connections to all stationary
equipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-6
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,
referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
C. Provide support for and connections to natural gas service meter in accordance with
requirements of the utility company, when so indicated on the Drawings.
D. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
E. Distribution piping shall be as short and as direct as practicable between the point of
delivery and the outlets.
F. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
G. Bury all underground piping at least 3 feet below finished grade. Provide a continuous
detectable warning tape on tamped backfill, 12 inches above all buried non-metallic gas
lines.
H. Do not install gas piping in the same trench with other utilities. The minimum horizontal
clearance between gas pipe and parallel utility pipe shall be 2 feet. Do not install gas pipe
through catch basins, vaults, manholes or similar underground structures.
I. Install and support all polyethylene piping in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. All heat fusion welds shall be performed by welders qualified to the
manufacturer’s procedures.
J. Polyethylene piping shall not be installed above ground.
K. Provide connection between buried plastic gas piping and metallic riser in accordance with
the gas code.
L. All above ground gas piping shall be electrically continuous and bonded to electrical
system ground conductor in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Provide and install union type fittings at proper points to permit dismantling or removal of
pipe. No unions will be required in welded lines except at equipment connections. Where
union type fittings are necessary for piping dismantling purposes, right and left nipples and
couplings shall be used. Flanges, ground-joint unions or approved flexible appliance
connectors may be used at exposed fixture, appliance or equipment connections.
N. Provide dielectric isolation device where copper lines connect to ferrous lines or
equipment, such as dielectric coupling or dielectric flange fitting.
O. Valves, regulators, flanges, union type fittings and similar appurtenances shall be accessible
for operation and servicing and shall not be located above ceilings, within chases,
walls/partitions, spaces utilized as return air plenums or non-accessible locations.
P. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve building
space. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
Q. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-7
R. Make service connections at the top of the main, whenever the depth of the main is
sufficient to allow top connections. When service connections cannot be made at the top of
the main, they shall be made on the side of the main no lower than the horizontal midpoint
of the gas main.
S. Close nipples, bushing and cross type fittings shall not be installed in any gas piping
system.
T. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. Install drip/sediment traps at points where
condensate and debris may collect. Locate drip/sediment traps where readily accessible for
cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing.
Construct drip/sediment traps using tee fitting with capped nipple connected to bottom
outlet. Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 4 inches long, and
same size as connected pipe. Cap shall be screwed pattern, black, standard weight,
malleable iron. Install with adequate space for removal of cap.
U. Install valves for shut off and to isolate equipment, parts of systems, or vertical risers. All
valves shall be located such that servicing and operation is possible. All flanged valves
shown in horizontal lines with the valve stem shall be positioned so that the valve stem is
inclined one bolt hole above the horizontal position. Screw pattern valves placed in
horizontal lines shall be installed with their valve stems inclined at an angle of a minimum
of 30 degrees above the horizontal position. All valves must be true and straight at the time
the system is tested and inspected for final acceptance.
V. Install line shut-off valve at each branch connection to riser.
W. Provide adequate clearance for access to and operation of all valves.
X. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted unless required otherwise by
the valve manufacturer.
Y. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves and pipe casing sleeves to the exterior of the
building and terminated with outlet turned down and capped with corrosion resistant insect
screen. Vent terminations shall be at least seven feet above grade or pedestrian traffic and a
minimum three (3) feet above or twenty-five (25) feet horizontally from all air intakes or
building openings.
Z. Above ground horizontal natural gas and encasement piping shall be supported at intervals
of no greater than 6 foot for 1/2 inch piping, 8 foot for 3/4 inch and 1 inch piping and 10
foot for 1-1/4 inches and larger piping. Vertical piping shall be supported at each floor level
and at intervals as specified for horizontal piping.
AA. Extension bars shall not be used for supporting gas or encasement piping. Gas or
encasement piping shall not be used to support any other piping or component.
BB. Provide piping and valve identification in accordance with Project Specification Section 20
05 53.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF WELDED PIPING
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-8
A. Welding of pipe in normally occupied buildings is prohibited. Off-Site welding is
acceptable. Should welding be required in a normally occupied building for connecting to
an existing welded system, obtain written approval from the Owner and comply with
Owner’s fire and life safety requirements.
B. Piping and fittings shall be welded and fabricated in accordance with ASME/ANSI the
latest editions of Standard B32.1 for all systems from the Code for Pressure Piping.
Machine beveling in shop is preferred. Field beveling may be done by flame cutting to
recognized standards.
C. Ensure complete penetration of deposited metal with base metal. Provide filler metal
suitable for use with base metal. Maintain inside of fittings free from globules of weld
metal. All welded pipe joints shall be made by the fusion welding process, employing a
metallic arc or gas welding process. All pipes shall have the ends beveled 37-½ inch
degrees and all joints shall be aligned true before welding. Except as specified otherwise,
all changes in direction, intersection of lines, reduction in pipe size and the like shall be
made with factory-fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of
straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction will not be permitted.
D. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/16 inch. Set all fittings and
joints square and true and preserve alignment during welding operation. Use of alignment
rods inside pipe is prohibited.
E. Contractor shall not permit any weld to project within the pipe so as to restrict it. Tack
welds, if used, must be of the same material and made by the same procedure as the
completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welded during welding operation.
F. Do not split, bend, flatten or otherwise damage piping before, during or after installation.
G. Remove dirt, scale and other foreign matter from the inside of piping, by swabbing or
flushing, prior to the connection of other piping sections, fittings, valves or equipment.
H. In no cases shall Schedule 40 pipe be welded with less than three passes including one
stringer/root, one filler and one lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than
four passes including one stringer/root, two filler and one lacer. In all cases, however, the
weld must be filled before the cap weld is added.
3.5 TESTING
A. All natural gas systems shall be inspected, tested, purged and placed into operation in
accordance with NFPA 54 and as required herein.
B. All necessary apparatus for conducting tests shall be furnished by the Contractor and
comply with the requirements of NFPA 54.
C. All new rough-in distribution piping and affected portions of existing systems connected to,
shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure utilizing clean, dry air and must be
demonstrated to be absolutely tight when subjected to the pressures and time durations
listed herein. All equipment and components designed for operating pressures of less than
the test pressure shall not be connected to the piping system during test.
D. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is less than 0.5 pounds per square inch
gauge (psig), the test pressure shall be 5.0 psig and the time interval shall be 30 minutes.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEM 220160-9
E. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is between 0.5 psig and 5.0 psig, the test
pressure shall be 1.5 times the normal operating pressure or 5.0 psig, whichever is greater,
and the time interval shall be 30 minutes.
F. Systems on which the normal operating pressure is 5.0 psig or greater, the test pressure
shall be 1.5 times the normal operating pressure, and the time interval shall be one (1) hour.
G. After testing is complete, the entire gas system shall be purged with dry nitrogen to
eliminate all air, debris and moisture from the piping before natural gas is introduced into
the system.
H. After successful results of pressure test and purging have been completed, a leakage test
shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 54 Appendix D.
I. Connect, inspect and purge gas utilization equipment, lab hook-ups and outlets, and place
into operation only after successful results of pressure test, leakage test and purging have
been completed and accepted.
J. Testing operations shall be repeated until gas-piping systems are absolutely tight at the
pneumatic test pressures indicated above.
K. Pressure test gas piping sleeve system with clean, dry compressed air at 15 psig by
temporarily sealing all openings between gas carrier pipe and sleeve and vent openings.
Sleeve systems must be demonstrated to be absolutely tight when subjected to this pressure
for a period of four hours.
END OF SECTION
23 00 10-1
SECTION 23 00 10 - MECHANICAL GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic, due to scale, and indicate the general arrangements
and geometric relationships of equipment, systems, and services. They are not
intended to show or indicate every offset, sequence, device, option, fitting, valve,
or accessory. Plan work around building details and other crafts. Do not scale
drawings for exact sizes and locations.
B. Contractor shall base all his measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from
established benchmarks. All work shall agree with these established lines and
levels. Contractor shall verify all measurements at site and check correctness as
related to the work.
C. In case of interferences between trades, Engineer will decide which work is to
take precedence regardless of work that might be installed.
1.02. CODES, ORDINANCES, INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS
A. Work is to be executed and inspected in accordance with local and State codes,
laws, ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to particular class of work,
including the State Mechanical Code, State Plumbing Code, State Gas Code, and
State Fire Code. Associated fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
B. Should any part of drawings or specifications be found to be in conflict with
applicable codes or ordinances, notify the Engineer, in writing, within 72 hours
prior to bid deadline for review and/or correction of bid documents. After project
bidding is closed, any discovery of code violations shall be promptly reported to
the Engineer. Any work performed in violation of applicable codes or ordinances
shall be corrected without additional expense to the Owner or his representatives.
C. Pressure and heating vessels, including hot water storage containers, shall be
constructed in compliance with the rules and regulations of the Boiler Inspection
Division of the State. All installations of such equipment shall be made by a firm
licensed and approved by the Boiler Inspection Division of the State.
D. Facilities shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of the current
version of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Installation of mechanical
and plumbing systems including fixtures and control mounting heights, clear knee
space, and access clearances shall comply with ADA required dimensions, and as
shown on details or schedules when shown.
E. Contractor shall arrange with County, City or State, if City has no ordinances
covering work, for complete inspection, paying all charges required. Give proper
23 00 10-2
authority requisite notice relating the work; afford Engineer and authorized
inspectors adequate access to the Work for inspection; and be responsible for all
violations of law. Upon completion of work, have work inspected, if required,
obtaining certificates of inspection and approval from inspecting agency and
deliver certificates to Engineer and Owner.
1.03. REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
A. With the submission of his bid, Contractor shall give written notice to the
Engineer of any materials or apparatus believed inadequate or unsuitable, in
violation of laws, ordinances, rules or regulations of Authorities having
jurisdiction, and any necessary items of work omitted. In the absence of such
written notice, it is mutually agreed that the Contractor has included the cost of all
required items in his proposal for a complete project.
B. Contractor shall acknowledge that he has examined the Plans, Specifications, and
Site, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature
and location of the work; the general and local conditions, particularly those
bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage or materials;
availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather; the
confirmation and condition of the ground; the characters, quality and quantity of
subsurface materials to be encountered; the character of equipment and facilities
needed preliminary to and during the execution of the Work, especially the
prohibited use of Owner’s permanent equipment, ductwork, and controls; all
federal, state, county, township and municipal laws, ordinances, and regulations
particularly those relating to employment of labor, wage rates, and construction
methods; and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work or the
associated cost of the Work under this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to
acquaint himself with the available information concerning these conditions will
not relieve him from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or
cost of successfully performing the work.
C. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or
discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among
one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance
requirements. The higher performance requirement shall be considered the
equipment, material, device or installation method which represents the most
stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity.
1.04. USE OF THE OWNER’S EXISITNG AND NEW, PERMANENT HVAC SYSTEM
DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Use of the Owner’s existing and currently being installed, permanent HVAC
system during Construction is prohibited. Provide temporary means for heating
and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying completed
installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
temperature and humidity. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when
23 00 10-3
required to reduce substrate moisture levels required to accommodate installation
or application of finishes.
B. Maintain a minimum ambient temperature of 50 DEG. F. in areas where
construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in the specifications.
C. Prevent dust, fumes, construction debris, and odors from entering existing and
newly installed HVAC equipment, ductwork, and control system components.
Prior to commencing work, isolate HVAC equipment. Where existing HVAC
systems will be affected, isolate existing supply, return, and exhaust ducts by
disconnecting ductwork at point where existing duct shall remain. Cover ends of
existing ductwork securely with black plastic material.
D. Newly installed ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation. Each
section that is installed at the end of the day shall have open ends securely
covered with black plastic material.
E. Newly installed HVAC equipment shall be securely covered and protected with
black plastic material or by other approved method. After installation of air
moving equipment, duct connections shall be securely covered with black plastic
material. Connections to duct systems shall not be made until final finishes have
been installed, areas served are clean, and building is ready for HVAC equipment
start-up and use.
F. Securely cover control system components to prevent damage from construction
debris, dust, and dirt. Control systems shall not be energized for testing and
adjusting until HVAC system start-up.
G. HVAC Equipment, Ductwork, and Control Components contaminated by
construction debris, dirt, and construction dust shall not be acceptable and shall be
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. HVAC Equipment, Ductwork, and
Control components shall be kept clean throughout construction. Cleaning after
an HVAC system has been contaminated shall not be an acceptable alternate to
replacement.
1.05. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's catalog sheets and/or shop drawings covering all phases of
work included in this Contract.
B. Arrange submittals in sets and bind in PDF format. Loose sheets are not
acceptable. Indicate for each item the location, system, or position where it is to
be used, arrange by equipment type and tab sections.
1. Individual submittal packages may be made for plumbing, HVAC, fire
protection, test and balance, and controls. The Contractor may submit up
to 5 different packages, but where practical provide all submittals in a
single PDF.
23 00 10-4
2. Items which are required to be resubmitted shall come in a single PDF.
Approved equipment is not required to be resubmitted.
3. The Contractor is responsible for verification that all items are submitted.
C. Submittals shall bear written certification to the effect that the Contractor has
examined them and found them to include all items required to be submitted and
to be in accordance with specifications.
D. Submittals are required even though equipment being furnished is exactly as
specified.
E. Submittals shall include all data required in individual sections of these
specifications.
F. Contractor is responsible for making all submittals required by the specifications
for approval. If equipment is delivered or installed without an approved submittal,
Contractor may be required to remove and replace equipment with specified and
approved equipment, as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost to the
project.
G. Exceptions for Submittals
1. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined in a
separate section of each submittal package. The submittal shall contain
the reason for the exception, the exact nature of the exception and the
proposed substitution so that a proper evaluation may be made by the
Engineer. The acceptability of any device or methodology submitted as an
“or equal” or “exception” to the Specifications shall be at the sole
discretion of the Engineer.
2. By noting the term “compliance”, it shall be understood that the
Contractor is in full compliance with the item specified and will provide
exactly the same with no deviations.
3. By noting the term “deviation”, it shall be understood that the Contractor
prefers to provide a different component in lieu of the one specified and in
so doing, takes full responsibility for making the equipment work as
specified and will provide any and all ancillary components to make the
equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner.
4. By noting the term “alternate”, it shall be understood that the manufacturer
proposes to provide the same operating function but prefers to do it in a
different manner and in so doing, takes full responsibility for making the
equipment work as specified and will provide necessary ancillary
components to make the equipment work at no extra cost to the Owner.
The alternate method shall be fully described with schematic diagrams and
one-line diagrams as applicable.
23 00 10-5
1.06. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. Final decision as to whether or not a specific piece of equipment meets
specifications shall rest with Engineer.
B. Substitution requests will not be accepted prior to bid.
C. Equipment and material manufacturers are referenced in the Plans and
Specifications to establish the basis of design and required standards.
D. With each Substitution Request, submit technical data that will fully establish the
equality of the proposed substitute product with that listed. Submit completed
Substitution Request Form.
E. Substitution Process
1. The naming of a manufacturer’s product with the words “basis of design”
or the naming of a single manufacturer’s product on a drawing equipment
schedule, on other drawings, or in the specifications, establishes that
specific product as the basis for design. In the absence of any other named
acceptable manufacturer’s product, provide the “basis of design” product.
No substitutions will be accepted.
2. Where other manufacturer’s names are listed on the drawings or in the
specifications as acceptable in addition to the “basis of design” product,
product acceptability for these manufacturers shall be verified via
submittal review after the project has bid. No other substitutions will be
accepted.
3. Where the words “include but shall not be limited to” or “or equal” are
used in addition to a manufacturer’s name or a list of manufacturer’s
names, product acceptability for these manufacturers shall be verified via
submittal review after the project has bid.
4. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all of the data necessary
to establish acceptability of the product.
5. The submittal for the substitution will be reviewed for conformance with
the specifications and equality to the specified products. Full submittals
will be required of all equipment. Substitution submittals will be reviewed
and shall be rejected if the proposed equipment is found to be different
than indicated on the Substitution Request Form, or is found deficient
compared to scheduled performance/or specifications.
F. Any proposed substitutions of equipment shall be accompanied by product
submittal and shop drawings showing revised equipment layouts, piping
diagrams, ductwork drawings and/or wiring diagrams. Where substituted
equipment furnished requires use of larger, more, or differently arranged
23 00 10-6
connections, such connections shall be installed to the complete satisfaction of
Engineer without additional cost to Owner.
G. The Contractor is responsible for full coordination of all changes required by
substituted equipment, including dimensional clearance.
H. The Contractor is responsible for all additional costs of equipment installation,
coordination and engineering which results from his substitution. This includes all
aspects of the work including architectural, structural, civil, electrical, and
mechanical. This also includes costs for the redesign time of Architects and
Engineers.
I. Costs associated with dimensional, performance, or other deviations from the
“basis of design” equipment, including engineering costs to evaluate such
deviations, shall be paid by the Contractor. If a product other than the “basis of
design” product is submitted and subsequently rejected during the submittal
process, Contractor shall provide the “basis of design” product.
J. Should a substitution be accepted and subsequently proven unsatisfactory for the
service intended within the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide the basis
of design, or make corrections as directed by Engineer.
1.07. GUARANTY-WARRANTY
A. Guarantee shall include capacity and integrated performance of component parts
of various systems in strict accord with the intent and purpose of these
specifications. Conduct such tests as herein specified or as may be required by
the Engineer to demonstrate capacity and performance ability of various systems
to maintain specified conditions.
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in the mechanical division,
tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or
equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond;
and names, addresses, telephone numbers, and procedures for filing a claim and
obtaining warranty services.
D. All materials and equipment shall carry a full year's warranty from time Owner
accepts building or the date of substantial completion, whichever is earlier,
regardless of start-up date of equipment, unless a longer warranty period is
specified under other sections. Longer warranty periods for specific items shall
be listed in other sections of these specifications.
PART 2 MATERIAL
2.01. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
23 00 10-7
A. Equipment shall be new, undamaged, and of the same manufacturer except where
indicated otherwise.
B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct
identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during
shipment, storage, and handling.
C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in
writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.
D. Protect work and equipment at all times from damage, weather, and entrance of
dirt and water. Close pipe and duct openings with caps or plugs during
installation.
2.02. ELECTRICAL
A. Contractor shall carefully coordinate voltage and amperage requirements of
equipment to be provided. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor prior to
equipment order. Any change to electrical systems required by Contractor’s
substitutions or uncoordinated equipment needs shall be made without cost to the
project.
B. Provide all electrical interlock, control, and other wiring, not covered specifically
under the electrical drawings and specifications, for proper operation and control
of all equipment specified under this Division of the specifications.
C. Supervise and coordinate all electrical work in connection with mechanical
systems.
D. Furnish all motor controllers and contactors, not furnished as part of a motor
control center, or by Electrical Division for proper operation of all motors. Submit
motor data with submittals.
2.03. ROOF AND FLASHINGS
A. A. Special care shall be taken on roofs to prevent damage. Promptly repair
any damage at no additional expense to the Owner. Comply with bonding
requirements of new and existing roofs.
B. B. Flashings are not covered by this section. Refer to Architectural Division.
2.04. ACCESS PANELS
A. Provide access panels in all floors, walls, and plaster and non-lay-in type ceilings
as required or as indicated to service devices in piping requiring access, controls,
devices in ductwork requiring access, and other system components requiring
access for service or regular maintenance. Closely coordinate requirements for
23 00 10-8
access doors before bidding.
B. Access doors shall be "Milcor" type appropriate for the construction involved.
C. Size and type shall be as required for proper service and/or as may be directed by
the Engineer. Minimum size to be 24” x 24”.
2.05. ASBESTOS AND OTHER HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. No Asbestos containing materials shall be used on this project.
B. Contractor is responsible for his own means and methods of safety where
Hazardous or Toxic materials are use for the installation of his work. All work
shall comply with state and federal regulations.
C. Contractor shall protect the Owner's facility and employees from conditions
generated by his work.
D. In the event that a potentially hazardous material is discovered during the course
of the work, Contractor shall stop work immediately, and provide for the safety of
his employees and other occupants. He shall make proper notifications as required
by his contract and by law.
2.06. CONCRETE
A. Concrete materials and installations indicated on the drawings for curbs, pads, and
supports for mechanical equipment shall be provided as part of the contract.
B. Comply with other architectural and structural portions of the specifications for
materials and methods.
C. Concrete.
1. Concrete shall be commercial grade containing Portland cement,
aggregates, clean water, and mix ratios suitable for the loads, and site
conditions.
2. Concrete shall be 3,000 psi class indoors and 3,500 psi class outdoors
unless noted otherwise.
3. Comply with ACI standards for cold and hot weather applications.
D. Installation
1. Use rigid and smooth forms to prevent visible defects and deflections in
the work. Use form compound to prevent concrete bonding to the forms.
2. Provide chamfered corners on the tops of curbs.
23 00 10-9
3. Reinforce pads and curbs with steel reinforcing bars minimum size
number 3, welded wire fabric, or as indicated on the drawings. Set the
reinforcing depth within the concrete for optimum strength for the
application.
4. Provide equipment pads of sizes indicated and at least large enough to
extend past the mechanical equipment 6" on all sides. Minimum height 6”
unless otherwise noted.
5. Pour pads integral with the floor slab, isolate from the floor slab, or dowel
the pads, as indicated on the drawings.
6. Grout all voids with high strength grout mixture.
7. Installation of the pads shall be coordinated so that the concrete has set
and the strength is suitable for installation of the equipment.
8. Set anchor bolts where indicated by either equipment manufacturer or
Structural Engineer.
9. Brush-finish equipment pads.
2.07. LOCAL SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before bidding, make complete investigation at site in order to be informed as to
location of utilities and as to conditions under which work is to be performed.
Utility locations shown were obtained from surveys and/or local utility companies
and are offered as a general guide only and are not to be assured accurate.
B. Make determination of soil conditions before bidding. These specifications and
accompanying drawings in no way imply condition of soil to be encountered.
2.08. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling in connection with the mechanical system,
to a point 5'-0" outside the building, is included as part of this Division, unless
indicated otherwise.
B. Excavation required shall be done as part of the contract price regardless of any
implied conditions on the drawings or in these specifications.
C. Excavation to have 12" minimum and 24" maximum clearance on all sides. Do
not carry excavation below required level unless indicated otherwise on the
drawings. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at no
expense to Owner with earth, sand, gravel, or concrete, as directed by Engineer
and thoroughly compacted. Remove any unstable soil and replace with gravel,
crushed stone, or clean sand and thoroughly compact. Engineer will determine the
depth of removal of any unstable soil encountered. Grade ground adjacent to
23 00 10-10
excavation to prevent water from running into excavation. Remove accumulated
water in the excavation.
D. Banks of trenches shall be vertical or as shown on the drawings. Width of trench
shall be 5" minimum, 8" maximum on each side of pipe bell. Excavate bell holes
accurately to size by hand. In rock, excavations shall be carried 8" below bottom
of pipe. Use loose earth or gravel for backfill and tamp thoroughly.
E. Bracing, sheathing, and shoring shall be performed as necessary to complete and
protect excavations indicated on the drawings, as required for safety, as directed
by Engineer, and to conform to governing laws and state and federal regulations.
Comply with OSHA Regulations.
F. After piping installation, inspection, testing, and approval by governing agency;
backfill trenches with clean, stable soil free from stones. Place backfill in 4"
layers, tamped under and around pipe and conduit to height of at least 2' above
pipe. Tamping shall be done in such manner as not to disturb underlying work.
Remainder of trenches and excavations shall be backfilled with clean, stable
earth, deposited in 8" layers and brought up to rough grade, with each layer
compacted to density of surrounding soil. Remove sheathing and shoring as
backfill is placed and fill space with dry sand. Compaction tests may be required
by the Engineer, with the costs paid by the Contractor.
G. Underground piping shall be marked with metallic marking tape inserted in the
trench a minimum of 12" below grade and a minimum of 12" above mains.
H. Replace existing appurtenances removed or damaged in connection with work,
and restore to original conditions, unless directed otherwise.
2.09. MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and material installation with other building
components and other trades. Investigate each space in the structure through
which mechanical equipment furnished under these specifications must pass to
reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to
permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. By ordering equipment, Contractor
assumes responsibility for the installation and orientation of equipment in the
available space.
C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for
mechanical installations.
D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
23 00 10-11
equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.
F. Fit equipment, pipe, and duct into the available spaces in the building and
introduce into the building, at a time, and in a manner, as not to damage the
structure. Install ductwork and piping to provide the maximum possible clear
height underneath.
G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the
installation of mechanical equipment and materials.
H. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical
services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
I. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement
of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum of interference with other installations.
J. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings
with suspension systems, light fixtures, and other installations.
K. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing
regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide
required connection for each service.
L. Do not support material or equipment of other trades from piping or ductwork.
M. Do not use equipment, piping, or ductwork as scaffolding, scaffolding support, or
as other means to access the work. Damaged systems and components shall be
repaired or replaced in accordance with the full satisfaction of the Owner and
Engineer.
N. Core drill piping penetrations of concrete walls, floors, and other concrete
structures.
O. Equipment locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Final locations
shall be established and determined in the field to best utilize available space.
P. Replace architectural features removed or damaged during the course of the work.
Q. Maintain fire assembly ratings as dictated by authorities having jurisdiction. Seal
around penetrations through UL rated assemblies, fire, and smoke walls.
R. Fully seal around duct or pipe routed through exterior walls.
2.10. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
23 00 10-12
A. Each equipment item with drain connections shall be provided with a properly-
sized drain run to the nearest floor drain or as directed.
B. Rough-in and make final required connections to equipment, furnished under
other Divisions of the Specifications or by the Owner.
1. Provide necessary labor and materials for a complete installation. Trap and
vent drainage connections as required.
2. If equipment or fixtures furnished by others are not delivered prior to final
acceptance, services shall be capped or plugged at walls or floor as
directed, ready for future connection.
C. No equipment or fixture shall be "roughed-in" until proper rough-in drawings are
provided to the installer.
D. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
2.11. CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Provide cutting and patching required to perform the mechanical work, when
alteration, repair, renovation, or addition, to existing construction is specified or
required for new work.
B. Cutting of structural members will not be permitted except through explicit
instructions from the Engineer. Reinforcing will be required where members are
cut.
C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of
cutting and patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a
result of mechanical installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that
is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2. Remove and replace defective Work.
3. Remove and replace Work not confirming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
5. Upon written instructions from Engineer, uncover and restore Work to
23 00 10-13
provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.
2.12. GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, base
plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
I. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-
cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5,000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.13. SEISMIC
A. Mechanical systems shall be installed in conformance with the requirements of
the state and federal codes and regulations for Seismic considerations, as specified
and noted on the drawings.
B. All seismic restraining and snubbing devices shall be manufactured specifically
for this duty. Devices constructed by the Contractor will not be accepted.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of the restraining
and snubbing systems based on the criteria included on the drawings and in the
specifications, and the actual equipment, and locations of installation.
2.14. START UP, TESTING, AND ADJUSTING
A. Contractor shall include adequate time in construction schedule for HVAC system
start-up; testing, adjusting, and balancing; and control system installation,
23 00 10-14
programming, testing, and commissioning.
B. Each and every phase of the plumbing, air conditioning, heating and ventilating
systems shall be operated separately, or in conjunction, one with the other, for a
sufficient period of time to demonstrate to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer the
ability of the systems to meet the capacity and the performance requirements while
maintaining design conditions, in accordance with the intent of these specifications.
C. Previous to any performance tests, the Contractor shall have set and adjusted
valves, dampers, motors, controllers, thermostats, and other items as are necessary
to properly balance phases of the mechanical systems and shall have the systems
operating and maintaining design temperatures, humidity, and air circulation
throughout all areas of the building.
D. See other sections of these specifications for other possible records and tests to be
made.
E. During the first-year warranty, the Contractor may be required to make some or
all of the readings above to assure system is functioning properly through the
various seasons. Contractor shall make additional adjustments as required.
2.15. PAINTING
A. Provide mechanical equipment with factory painted finish. Where factory finish
is damaged during handling and installation, use touch-up paint of same type and
color as original paint. Where extensive refinishing of factory applied finishes are
required, equipment shall be repainted by the factory.
B. All uninsulated, ferrous equipment, tanks, pipes, fittings, pipe hangers, supports,
miscellaneous steel, and ironwork without factory finish shall be primed and
painted. Do not paint galvanized hanger rods or galvanized duct straps.
1. Where exposed to view, except in mechanical spaces, color shall be as
selected by the Architect.
2. Where located in mechanical spaces or in areas not exposed to view, color
shall be as directed by Owner’s representative to match Owner’s existing
color schedule. In the absence of an Owner’s color schedule, color shall
be black.
C. All insulated mechanical equipment, tanks, and piping not provided with a factory
finish shall be painted.
1. Where exposed to view, except in mechanical spaces, color shall be as
selected by the Architect.
2. Where located in mechanical spaces or in areas not exposed to view, color
shall be as directed by Owner’s representative to match Owner’s existing
color schedule. In the absence of an Owner’s color schedule, color shall
23 00 10-15
be black.
D. For uninsulated material to be painted, prime with one coat of alkyd primer and
paint with two coats of alkyd enamel gloss. Paint shall be suitable for the
environmental and temperature conditions where material is installed.
E. Paint insulated material with two coats of alkyd enamel gloss. Paint shall be suitable
for the environmental and temperature conditions where material is installed.
F. Prepare surfaces for painting in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s
requirements. Remove or protect portions of the work which are not to be painted.
G. Apply primer coat(s) of paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
H. Apply final coat(s) of paint as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Apply
paint by brush or roller as dictated by the surface to be painted. Paint should have
a smooth appearance without cloudiness, spotting, marks, runs, or other surface
imperfections.
I. Clean-up the area of materials, waste, and rubbish. Clean splattered surfaces.
J. Protect the work from damage. Touch-up and restore defaced painted surfaces at
the end of the project.
2.16. NOISE: Contractor shall isolate pipes, ductwork, equipment, and other items to insure no
additional noise is generated or transmitted to the building when systems are in operation.
2.17. ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment
and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. See
Paragraph 3.11 for painting.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
2.18. OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall provide bound manuals containing complete repair parts' lists,
and operating service and maintenance instructions for equipment provided. The
manual shall include:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete
nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in,
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,
shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating
instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
23 00 10-16
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and
adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing and instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
B. Contractor shall carefully instruct the Owner's operations personnel during the
adjustment and testing period of the equipment for such length of time as may be
necessary to thoroughly familiarize them with the proper care, operation, and
maintenance of the equipment.
C. Contractor shall turn special tools, maintenance items, keys, other devices and
materials required to operate or maintain the systems over to the Owner.
2.19. CLEAN UP
A. Do not allow waste material or rubbish to accumulate in or about jobsite. Clean
work areas daily.
B. At completion of work, remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials
from and about building, leaving work clean and ready for use without further
cleaning required. Clean equipment, piping, valves, fixtures, and fittings of
grease, metal cuttings, insulation cement, dust, dirt, paper labels, and other
materials that are not part of the final finish.
C. Any discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish or furnishings
due to failure to properly clean or keep mechanical systems clean shall be
repaired without cost to Owner.
2.20. NAMEPLATE DATA:
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated
mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,
serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested
compliances, and similar essential data.
B. Locate nameplates in an accessible location. Where manufacturer’s name plate is
not stamped or engraved, provide additional heavy gauge aluminum or brass,
stamped or engraved nameplate.
C. Do not remove manufacturer’s nameplates. When manufacturer’s nameplates are
to be covered by insulation or other material, provide a separate nameplate for
mounting on the exterior of the covering.
2.21. RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. At completion of this project, the Contractor shall provide Engineer with one set of
"red lined" design drawings and specification showing all Work installed by him.
B. These documents shall incorporate all changes made in the course of the project
23 00 10-17
so as to enable the Owner to properly maintain, operate, and repair both exposed
and concealed work. The redlines shall indicate changes:
1. Made by Contractor.
2. Addendum Items.
3. Change Orders.
4. Substitutions.
C. Drawings and specifications shall be updated during the progress of the work and
kept at the job site.
D. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue-line or black-line prints of the Contract
Drawings, Submittals, and Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where
installation varies from that shown originally.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that
would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing
technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and
check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2.22. FINAL PROJECT OBSERVATION: The final project observation shall not be made
until the following items have been assembled and approved as indicated in other
sections of the specifications.
A. Certificate of acceptance from local inspecting authorities.
B. Letter of compliance from the Controls Systems Provider indicating that the
system is complete, fully operational, and installed as specified by manufacturer’s
certified or licensed individuals.
C. Test and Balance report.
D. Owner's Operations and Maintenance manual.
E. Copies of bonds, insurance certificates, waivers, affidavits, warranties and
guarantees, and other documents required in the specifications signed and ready
for appropriate action.
F. Written notification from the Contractor that the work is complete and ready for
final observation and the above documents are completed and available
23 00 10-18
G. Other documentation which may be required by the Engineer.
2.23. PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The final mechanical systems closeout shall not be completed until the Contractor
has completed his work and submitted the documents required by Division 1
portions of the specifications. In addition the following work items and specific
mechanical documents described in other portions of this specification section
shall also be submitted and approved:
1. Record drawings.
2. Record specifications.
3. Guarantee and Warranties.
4. Operating and Maintenance Manuals (O&M). O&M Manuals shall also be
provided to the Owner in duplicate. Manuals shall contain approved shop
drawings, operations and maintenance instructions, parts manuals for
HVAC equipment, an accurate set of design plans showing all construction
revisions to the design set, and a copy of the test and balance report.
5. Final clean up.
6. Final Test and Balance Reports with startup logs.
7. Pipe and Equipment Identification.
8. Pipe test certifications.
9. Water treatment analysis and application.
10. Bonds, Insurance Certificates, Waivers, Affidavits, and other documents
required in the specifications signed and ready for appropriate action.
11. Other items which may be required by the Engineer.
B. Confirm in writing that specified training specified has been completed with the
Owner.
C. Confirm in writing that specified demonstrations have been completed with the
Owner.
D. Confirm that test and balance is complete.
END OF SECTION
23 00 15-1
SECTION 23 0015 - FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE STOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01. SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Through-penetration firestopping in fire rated construction.
B. Scope:
1. The scope of the work shall include the mechanical systems, HVAC
piping and ductwork, plumbing piping, fire protection piping, and other
systems installed by the contractor.
1.02. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories
1. U.L. Fire Resistant Directory
a. Through-penetration firestop devices (XHCR)
b. Fire resistance ratings (BXUV)
c. Through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ)
d. Fill, void, or cavity material (XHHW)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials Standards:
1. ASTM E 814-88: Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-
Penetration Firestops.
1.03. 1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to given type of
construction described or detailed in referenced documents.
B. Barriers: Time rated fire walls, time rated ceiling/floor assemblies, and structural
floors.
C. Firestopping: Methods and materials applied in penetrations and unprotected
openings to limit spread of heat, fire, gasses and smoke.
D. Penetration: Opening or foreign material passing through or into barrier or
structural floor such that full thickness of rated materials is not obtained.
E. System: Specific products and applications, classified and numbered by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to close specific barrier penetrations.
F. Sleeve: Metal fabrication or pipe section extending through thickness off barrier
and used to permanently guard penetration. Sleeves are described as part of
23 00 15-2
penetrating system in other sections and may or may not be required.
1.04. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements
1. Fire-rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire
resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations,
connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations
required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption,
and at other construction gaps.
2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance
to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types
of construction and at all separations required to permit building movement
and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with general conditions unless otherwise indicated.
B. Product data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the
following:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Shop drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes,
general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage
methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific
requirements.
1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and
applicable UL System number, or UL classified devices.
2. Manufacturer or manufacturers’ representative shall provide qualified
engineering judgements and drawings relating to non-standard
applications as needed.
D. Quality control submittals:
1. Statement of qualifications.
E. Applicators' qualifications statement:
1. List past projects indicating required experience.
1.06. QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
23 00 15-3
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.07. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning
characteristics.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating
approval of combustibility.
1.08. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is
below 60 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
D. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer.
E. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame.
F. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by
firestopping materials.
G. Comply with manufacturing recommendations for temperature and humidity
conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.
1.09. SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and
surrounding work is complete.
1.10. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of
systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the
following:
1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer, State or local authority where
applicable.
2. At least 2 years experience with systems.
3. Successfully completed at least 5 comparable scale projects using this
system.
B. Local and State regulatory requirements: Submit forms or acceptance for
proposed assemblies not conforming to specific UL Firestop System numbers, or
UL classified devices.
C. Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating at least equal to that of the
construction.
23 00 15-4
1.11. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible
manufacturer's identification.
2. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date, allow minimum
storage at site.
B. Storage and protection: Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated location.
Protect from soiling, abuse, moisture and freezing when required. Follow
manufacturer's instruction.
1.12. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing conditions:
1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct
unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.
2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and
supporting brackets have been installed.
1.13. GUARANTEE
A. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which
fail in joint adhesion, co-adhesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance,
extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability or
appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted
manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated.
The guarantee period shall be one year from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING OF FIRE-RATED CONSTRUCTION
A. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Director under categories
XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction
type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each
separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications.
Systems or devices must be asbestos-free.
1. Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as
an inherent property of the system, or by the use of a separate product
included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform
this function.
2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Those listed in the U.L. Fire
Resistance directory for the U.L. System involved and as further defined
in Part 3.06 of this section.
23 00 15-5
3. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. All trades
shall use products from the same manufacturer.
4. Products shall be 3M firestopping products and systems or equal.
2.02. SMOKE-STOPPING AT SMOKE PARTITIONS
A. Through-Penetration Smoke-Stopping: Any system complying with the
requirements for through-penetration firestopping in fire-rated construction, as
specified in this section, is acceptable, provided that the system includes the
specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire
resistance may be disregarded.
B. Construction-Gap Smoke-Stopping: Any system complying with the requirements
for construction-gap firestopping in fire-rated construction, as specified in this
section, is acceptable, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal
or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be
disregarded.
2.03. MATERIALS
A. Firestopping Material: Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric rubber
type foam compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos ceramic fibers.
B. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate
surfaces.
2.04. 2.04 ACCESSORIE
A. Fill, void or cavity materials: As classified under category XHHW in the U.L.
Fire Resistance Directory.
B. Forming materials: As classified under Category XHKU in the U.L. Fire
Resistance Directory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01. EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to
be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
1. Verify barrier penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for
application of materials.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02. SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil,
loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion,
23 00 15-6
or the required fire resistance.
3.03. INSTALLATION
A. Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instruction of the
U.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
C. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier.
D. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in
width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of
supporting same loading as floor.
E. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to a
uniform density and texture.
F. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.
G. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves,
piping, ductwork, conduit and other items requiring firestopping.
H. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation of
damper’s anchoring flanges - installed in accordance with fire damper
manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes,
ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions of opening with
firestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. Fire Resistance
Directory.
J. Install smoke stopping as specified for firestopping.
K. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space, double
width masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical 12 inch wide
fiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at maximum 15 foot
intervals.
L. Dam material to remain.
3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing
or enclosing areas.
B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by
cutting or penetration by other trades.
23 00 15-7
3.05. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Clean up spills of liquid components.
C. Neatly cut and trim materials as required.
D. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean
condition.
3.06. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.07. SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION
A. The installation shall be as required by manufacturer for type of construction,
Type of U.L. systems, type of penetration, and type of fire stopping system.
END OF SECTION
23020-1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
SECTION 23020
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section describes the demolition, removal, relocation, rerouting and reconnection of existing mechanical facilities, as required, shown and specified herein, to accomplish alteration, restoration and to accommodate new construction.
B. The work shall include but not be limited to, draining, disconnecting, relocating, removing and dismantling, in a neat and workmanlike manner, the items and their accessories as indicated or Shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A10.6 – Safety Requirements for Demolition
B. National Association of Demolition Contractors (NADC) – Demolition Safety Manual
C. NFPA 51B – Cutting and Welding Processes
D. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
E. NFPA 241 – Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations
F. OSHA 29 CRF 1910 – Occupational Safety and Health Standards
G. US EPA – Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition Schedule
B. Fire Watch Procedures
C. Inspection Report of Underground Piping Systems
D. Welding/Burning Permit – Obtain a welding/burning permit from the local Fire Official prior to the start of any welding or burning in accordance with the local Fire Code or as required by the Owner.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting, patching and removal shall be performed by workers skilled in the specific trades involved.
B. Job Conditions: Prior to start of work, make an inspection accompanied by the Engineer to determine physical condition of adjacent construction that is to remain.
1.05 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
A. Torch cutting of ductwork will not be permitted.
23020-2 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
B. Torch cutting of other mechanical equipment will be permitted only as indicated by the Engineer.
C. Any cutting method, which may create sparks, must include “Fire Watch” as required by the Fire Code and/or Owner’s Fire Insurance Carrier. Submit fire watch procedures for approval.
D. Draining operations must not damage building components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 Adequately sized rubbish containers for the proper and safe disposal of all debris.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Construct temporary partitions prior to any demolition work enclosing respective work. Erect temporary fencing and signage around demolished materials. Use water sprinkling and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt arising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
B. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished.
C. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring.
D. Do not begin the work until the time schedules and manner of operations have been approved by the Engineer and Owner. All interruptions of existing services shall be included in the schedules as approved by the Engineer and Owner.
3.02 GENERAL
A. Provide alteration and demolition of mechanical facilities as required by the contract drawings and specifications. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not show the exact location of all existing mechanical work. Where existing equipment shall remain in service during construction, provide rerouting and reconnection of mechanical services as required to maintain continuous service.
B. Review all equipment with the Engineer and Owner prior to disposal. Existing ductwork, piping, conduit and similar items to be abandoned that are not embedded in walls or floor slabs shall be completely removed unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cap open ends at all walls and floors.
C. Remove, store and protect all equipment or materials to be reused by the Owner as shown on the drawings. Coordinate exact location of storage with the Owner. Items indicated to be removed, and not designated for Owner's salvage or for reuse, may be salvaged by Contractor. Transport salvaged items that are not to be reused from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D. Temporarily cap ends of ductwork to avoid entry of dirt, debris, or discharge of foul odors and gases.
E. Where existing louvers or ductwork penetrations are to remain, blank-off the louver on
23020-3 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
the inside with galvanized sheet metal on both sides of 2-inch thick, 6 pcf density rigid fiberglass board insulation. Paint side attached to the louver with flat black paint.
F. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walkways, occupied areas, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Ensure safe passage of persons around or through area of demolition operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons.
G. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without five (5) days' prior written notice to the Engineer and Owner.
H. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials.
I. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building structures or Owner's operations.
J. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger or hazardous materials are encountered. Notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
K. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Do not cut or remove more than is necessary to accommodate the new construction or alteration.
L. Remove demolished materials from site daily. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Dispose of all material at an approved disposal facility.
M. Cover and protect floors, furniture, equipment and fixtures to avoid soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. Protect finished surfaces at all times and repair or replace, if damaged, to match existing construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
N. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building.
O. Protect new and existing roofs from damage.
P. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied portions of the facility, except when authorized in writing by Owner's representative. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the Owner. Contractor shall disconnect and seal only utilities to be demolished serving areas being demolished, prior to start of demolition work. If Contractor is required to disconnect utility services or other services to an occupied area, the Contractor shall provide temporary or alternative service to that area, as acceptable to the Owner.
3.03 PIPING REMOVAL
A. Cut off all welded piping square at the locations indicated on the drawings. No cutting will be required where the demolition ends at a flanged valve or equipment. Close off all openings of any remaining valves, piping or fittings with weld caps or blind flanges to prevent debris from entering the existing system.
B. Disconnect all threaded piping at the location indicated on the drawings. Close off all
23020-4 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
openings of remaining valves, piping, fittings and equipment with pipe plugs or pipe caps as required to prevent debris from entering the existing systems.
C. Remove all pipe hangers, supports, miscellaneous steel and anchors with the piping.
3.04 PROTECTION FROM FREEZING
A. It is intended that the building remain protected from damage due to freezing temperatures. To that end, existing equipment and systems used for heating shall remain in place and in operation until scheduling permits shutdown.
B. Where the removal of equipment and/or existing systems will leave an area unprotected from freezing, notify the Owner and Engineer at least 72 hours in advance prior to removal so appropriate steps can be taken by the Owner to protect the area. Provide temporary heating equipment sufficient to prevent freezing.
C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that piping systems that are being worked on are completely drained from water prior to the start of demolition. If water is not drained and the piping freezes it is the Contractor’s responsibility to replace piping at his own expense.
3.05 DISCONNECTION AND INTERRUPTION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES
A. When portions of an existing piping system or ductwork system are removed, and this removal causes loss of operation to another piece of equipment due to open (disconnected) piping or ductwork, then cap piping or ductwork or provide temporary piping or ductwork system to retain operation of various systems.
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
A. Remove all mechanical equipment as shown on the Contract Drawings. Remove all electrical work, including wiring between equipment, and wiring to power source or point of origin.
B. Where equipment is supported by steel and/or structural supports, remove these supports.
3.07 REFRIGERANT REMOVAL
A. Recover and dispose of all existing refrigerant charges in accordance with EPA regulations. Release of chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to atmosphere is prohibited per the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990.
3.08 DUCTWORK REMOVAL
A. Disconnect all ductwork, which must be removed, at the closest joint and resupport the remaining ductwork.
B. Prepare all remaining ductwork joints at the point of disconnection to receive new ducts or blank-off panels.
C. Remove all ductwork supports and miscellaneous steel with ductwork to be demolished.
3.09 INSULATION REMOVAL
23020-5 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A. Remove insulation, together with all piping, fittings, valves and equipment designated for demolition.
3.10 CONTROL WIRING REMOVAL
A. Disconnect and remove all control wiring and tubing, including conduit, for the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) System associated with equipment to be removed.
END OF SECTION
23 00 30-1
SECTION 23 00 30 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are
to be provided for operation of mechanical equipment. These components
include, but are not limited to, motors, starters, and disconnect switches when
indicated, furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment, or
furnished separately for mechanical equipment.
B. Furnish all motor controllers and contactors, not furnished as part of a motor
control center, for proper operation of all motors.
C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specification
sections and scheduled on the drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES:
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
B. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
E. National Electric Code (NFPA 70).
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Separate submittal is not required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and
other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for
which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.
B. The electrical work shall comply with the National Electric Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
23 00 30-2
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Equipment shall be by same manufacturer, except those items furnished by an
equipment manufacturer as an integral part of his equipment. Where possible the
equipment shall be by the same manufacturer specified in Division 16.
2.02 MOTORS: The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For
special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual
equipment specifications.
A. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven
loads.
B. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the
motor to operate in the service factor range.
C. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly-phase motors.
D. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degrees C. environment with maximum 90
degree C rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B insulation).
E. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,
and not less than 5 evenly spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
F. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.
G. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,
Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
1. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 56; use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.
2. Bearings:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
b. Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance.
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives
produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.
d. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings
are permitted.
23 00 30-3
3. Enclosure Type:
a. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or
remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.
c. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.
4. Overload Protection: Built-in thermal overload protection and, where
indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping
motor at starter.
5. Noise Rating: "Quiet".
6. Efficiency:
a. Motor shall comply with the efficiency requirements of the Energy
Independence and Security Act of 2007.
b. Motors smaller than 1 HP shall have minimum full load
efficiencies levels per NEMA Standards.
c. Motors 1 HP and larger shall be premium efficiency.
7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
2.03 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING:
A. Motor Starter Characteristics:
1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears,
except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3R or NEMA 12 with conduit
hubs installed by contractor, or units in hazardous locations which shall
have NEC proper class and division.
2. Type and size of starter shall conform to adopted standards and
recommended practices of the National Electric Code and Underwriters'
Laboratories.
B. Manual Switches: Manual switches shall have:
1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors.
23 00 30-4
2. Overload protection: Melting alloy type thermal overload relays.
3. Manual starters / switches are to be used on fractional horsepower motors
only.
C. Magnetic Starters:
1. Momentary contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for
single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated.
2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase.
3. Interlocks, witches and similar devices as required for coordination with
control requirements of controls sections.
4. Built-in 120 volt control circuit transformer, with 2 primary and one
secondary fuse, where service exceeds 240 volts. Fuses sized to carry
holding coil circuit and other connected devices.
5. Externally operated manual reset.
6. Under-voltage release or protection (3-wire control).
7. Branch circuit protection shall meet type 2 coordination protection.
8. A hand-off-auto selector switch shall be provided in addition to start-stop
buttons for all devices being controlled automatically.
9. Phase loss relay.
a. Provide protective relays with DPDT 600V rated contacts, locking
potentiometer undervoltage adjustment, and LED indicating light
at each starter for motors greater than 5 HP. Equal to Square D
Class 8430, Type MPD, mounted in suitable enclosure.
D. Motor Connections:
1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically
indicated.
E. Heater Contactors:
1. Contactors for resistance heat shall be by same manufacturer as starters
unless furnished with heaters. Contactors shall be of the magnetic type
and mounted in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure. Contactors
shall carry a UL listing and shall be rated for 100,000 cycles.
23 00 30-5
F. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible Switches: Fused, each phase; heavy duty; horsepower rated; non-
teasible, quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield;
solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring
reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged
doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "open" position; arc
quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated.
2. Non-fusible Switches: For equipment less than 1 horsepower, switches
shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and
voltage rating as indicated. For equipment 1 horsepower and larger,
switches shall be the same as fusible type.
2.04 CAPACITORS:
A. Features:
1. Individual unit cells, all welded steel housing, each capacitor internally
fused, non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant, craft tissue insulation,
and aluminum foil electrodes.
2. KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90
percent or better and shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and
larger that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 percent at
rated load.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor
manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and
other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other
drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3
hp and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless
otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.
B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory-installed on
equipment unit to electrical installer for installation.
C. Install starters and wiring devices at locations indicated, securely supported and
anchored, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Locate
for proper operation access, including visibility, and for safety. Do not cover
equipment data or informational tags when device is to be mounted on equipment.
23 00 30-6
D. Install control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable
provisions of Electrical. Install equipment grounding except where non-grounded
isolation of motor is indicated.
E. Connect protective relays to line side lugs of the motor starter and wire control
contacts into motor starter circuit.
F. Label starters with engraved plastic nameplate describing the equipment served,
e.g., "A.C. Unit No. 1". Nameplates shall be U.V. stabilized for use indoor /
outdoor. Attach nameplates with clear silicone sealant.
END OF SECTION
23 00 75-1
SECTION 23 0075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification applications:
1. Equipment identification.
2. Pipe identification.
3. Valve tags.
4. Valve schedule.
5. Duct identification.
1.02. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product proposed.
B. Product Schedule: Provide schedule indicating each type of identification
material to be used for equipment, piping, and ductwork. Indicate colors to be
used.
C. Valve Schedule: Submit a valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and
reproduced on 8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Provide three (3) copies. Mark valves
which are intended for emergency shut-off, normally open, normally closed, and
similar special uses by special flag in the margin of the schedule. Include the
following for each valve:
1. Valve identification number.
2. System.
3. Purpose.
4. Location.
5. Type.
6. Size.
7. Manufacturer.
23 00 75-2
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification
of Piping Systems”, for letter size, length of color field, for colors not included in
the schedule herein, and for viewing angles of identification devices for piping.
1.04. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and
doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Engraved Plastic Laminate Identification Signs
1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes
and thicknesses indicated, with engraver’s standard letter style, black with
white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for
mechanical fastening except where using adhesive mounting.
2. Thickness: 1/16” for units up to 20 inches square or 8” length; 1/8” for
larger units.
3. Fasteners: Self tapping stainless steel screws except use contact-type,
permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the
substrate. Where sign cannot be attached directly to device or equipment,
attach with brass chain.
4. Letter sizes: Minimum ¼ inch for names of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionally larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of the principal
lettering.
2.02. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. All above grade piping shall be identified with pipe markers with colors as
indicated. Identification shall have proper legend and meet OSHA specifications.
Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise noted.
23 00 75-3
B. For piping where diameter including insulation is less than 8”, pipe markers shall
be plastic, pre-tensioned, semi-rigid type that encircles entire pipe without the use
of adhesives. Tape and sticker types are unacceptable.
C. For piping where diameter including insulation is 8” or greater, pipe markers shall
be plastic, full-band, semi-rigid type strapped to pipe using manufacturer’s
standard stainless steel bands.
D. Underground line markers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright colored,
continuous printed, plastic tape intended for direct burial service, not less than 6”
wide and 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates
the type of buried pipe.
E. Manufacturer: Pipe markers as manufactured by Seton, Brady, Brimar, or EMED
are acceptable.
F. Identification Schedule:
Piping System Legend Band/Text Color
1. Plumbing Piping System
Cold Water Cold Water Green/White
Hot Water Hot Water Yellow/Black
Hot Water Return Hot Water Return Yellow/Black
2. Gas Piping System
Low Pressure Natural Gas Low Pressure Gas Yellow/Black
High Pressure Natural Gas High Pressure Gas Yellow/Black
Gas Vent Gas Vent Yellow/Black
3. Sanitary Sewer System
Sanitary Waste Sanitary Sewer Green/White
Sanitary Vent Sanitary Vent Green/White
23 00 75-4
4. Storm Drain System
Storm Drain Storm Drain Green/White
G. Arrows and lettering shall be black. Arrows shall point in the direction of flow.
Locate downstream of pipe legend.
H. Arrows shall be of same color as bands and shall point in direction of flow.
Locate downstream of pipe legend.
I. Valve Identification: Provide brass tags for all valves and steam traps with legend
describing function of each valve and trap. Tag shall also indicate normally open
or normally closed, where position is noted on the drawings.
J. Valve Tags: Brass tags shall be a minimum of 2" diameter or 3-1/2" oval, to
accommodate 1" high numbers. Tag shall be equipped with a 3/16" X 6" long
brass chain.
2.03. DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Engraved Plastic Laminate Identification Signs
1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes
and thicknesses indicated, with engraver’s standard letter style, colored
black background with white letters except as otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/16” for units up to 20 inches square or 8” length; 1/8” for
larger units.
3. Fasteners: Contact-type, permanent adhesive.
4. Letter sizes: Minimum ¼ inch for names of units if viewing distance is
less than 24 inches, ½ inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionally larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of the principal
lettering.
B. Stencils: As specified and indicated herein.
2.04. STENCILS: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum
letter height of 1-1/4” for ducts; and minimum letter height of ¾” for equipment and
access door signs. Use alkyd paint. Use stencils only as directed herein.
23 00 75-5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide permanent, factory, operational data, nameplate on each item of power
operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model
number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of
tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible
location. Where manufacturer’s nameplate is not stamped or engraved, provide
additional heavy gauge, aluminum or brass, stamped or engraved nameplate. Do
not remove manufacturer’s nameplates. When manufacturer’s nameplates are to
be covered by insulation or other material, provide a separate nameplate for
mounting on the exterior of the covering.
B. In addition to factory nameplate, provide an engraved plastic laminate (stenciled)
identification sign for each major item of mechanical equipment and each
operational device. Provide identification signs for the following general
categories of equipment.
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets or steam relief valves.
2. Chillers, cooling towers, condensing units, compressors, pumps, and
similar motor-driven units.
3. Heat exchangers, coils, and similar equipment.
4. Fans and blowers.
5. Packaged and central-station type air units.
6. Tanks and pressure vessels.
7. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems, and similar
equipment.
8. Control panels.
9. Fuel burning units, such as boilers, furnaces, and heaters.
10. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
C. Provide engraved sign at each access door, indicating equipment or device to be
accessed.
D. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in equipment
identification with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled, or as
designated by the Owner’s representative. Provide numbers, lettering, and
23 00 75-6
wording as indicated or as directed by the Owner’s representative. Owner shall
set priority for lettering and graphics. Where multiple systems of the same
generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates
individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, AHU-
1H, Standpipe G14).
3.02. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket under each plastic pipe
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes where fluid temperatures will be
125F or greater. Insulation shall extend 4” beyond edges of marker.
B. Valve tags and steam traps shall be numbered as indicated on the valve listing
provided to the Owner.
C. See Section 15050 for piping to be painted.
D. As a minimum, identification shall be applied to piping at the following locations:
1. Adjacent to each valve.
2. At each branch and riser take-off.
3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor, and ceiling construction.
4. At each pipe passage to underground.
5. At not more than forty feet spacing on straight pipe runs.
E. Place identification so it can be easily read. Arrows shall be applied to indicate
direction of flow.
F. Underground Piping: During back-filling of each exterior underground piping
system, install plastic line marker, located directly over buried line no deeper than
8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench
and do not exceed overall width of 16”, install a single line marker.
3.03. DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify ductwork using stenciled signs. Letter color for stenciled signs shall be
either white or black. Provide the color that produces the most contrast with the
covering being stenciled. Indicate direction of flow, air handling unit or fan, air
terminal box, and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust).
B. Apply ductwork identification at the following locations:
1. Adjacent to each damper.
2. At each passage through walls, floors, or ceiling construction.
23 00 75-7
3. At no more than forty feet intervals.
4. At air handling units, fans, and air terminal boxes
END OF SECTION 23 0075
23 00 86-1
SECTION 23 0086
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01. SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install piping insulation, jackets, and
accessories indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for
proper installation.
B. Insulation of Underground Piping is specified elsewhere and not work of this Section.
1.02. REFERENCE STANDARDS
C. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
D. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
E. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable
requirements and standards addressed within the following references:
1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.
3. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
5. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
6. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
Cement.
7. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat
Flow Meter Apparatus.
8. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form.
9. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
10. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
23 00 86-2
11. ASTM C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
12. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
13. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation.
14. ASTM C450 - Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel
Lagging.
15. ASTM C610 - Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
16. ASTM C921 - Jackets for Thermal Insulation.
17. ASTM C1126 - Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation.
18. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
19. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials – Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-
Cell).
20. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
21. ASTM C795 - Insulation For Use Over Austenitic Steel.
22. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
23. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
24. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
25. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
26. ASTM D5590 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint
Films and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar
Plate Assay
1.03. DEFINITIONS
F. Concealed: Areas that cannot be seen by the building occupants.
G. Interior Exposed: Areas that are exposed to view by the building occupants, including
underneath countertops, inside cabinets and closets, and all equipment rooms.
H. Interior: Areas inside the building exterior envelope that are not exposed to the outdoors.
I. Exterior: Areas outside the building exterior envelope that are exposed to the outdoors,
including building crawl spaces and loading dock areas.
23 00 86-3
J. Unconditioned Space: Interior space that is not temperature-controlled by cooling and/or
heating system. Includes attics, chases, unconditioned living spaces and non-conditioned
equipment rooms.
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
K. All piping requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a
complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and
materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.
L. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, and accessories utilized in the
fabrication of these systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25
flame spread and 50 smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation
manufacturer for guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation
system, unless a specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an
exception to this requirement.
1. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with submittal data.
2. No material shall be used that, when tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is
found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the continuity of the flame
front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread rating.
M. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section
shall have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade.
N. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly
engaged in such occupation.
O. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with
factory printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate,
damaged or water-soaked Work will not be acceptable.
P. Stainless Steel: Insulation applied on stainless steel shall meet requirements of ASTM
C795 and NRC 1.36. These requirements are for prevention of external stress Corrosion
Cracking (ESCC) for austenitic stainless steel.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
Q. Prepare a schedule of piping insulation showing systems insulated. For each system, show
insulation type, thickness, temperature rating, and special conditions where applicable.
R. Submit product data for each piping system. Product data shall include but not be limited
to the following:
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Insulation material and thickness
23 00 86-4
3. Jacket
4. Adhesives
5. Fastening methods
6. Fitting materials
7. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, temperature
ratings
8. Insulation installation details (manufacturer's installation instructions/details,
Contractor's installation details, MICA plates where applicable)
9. Other appropriate data
S. Samples: When requested, submit three (3) samples of any representative size illustrating
each insulation type.
T. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable standards
will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect.
1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
U. Deliver materials to the Project Site in original factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer’s identification including product thermal ratings and thickness.
V. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
W. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics and insulation cements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.02. MANUFACTURERS
B. Insulation:
1. Owens-Corning
2. Certainteed Corporation
23 00 86-5
3. Johns Manville Corporation
4. Knauf Corporation
5. Armstrong/Armacell (Armaflex)
6. RBX Industries/Rubatex
7. FOAMGLAS (Cellular Glass) by Pittsburgh Corning
C. Jackets:
1. Childers Products Company
2. PABCO
3. RPR Products, Inc.
4. John Mansfield Speedline
5. Foamglas
D. Coatings, Sealants, and Adhesives:
1. Foster
2. Childers
2.03. INSULATION MATERIALS
E. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
F. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content
of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
G. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
H. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
I. Piping Insulation Type P1: Glass-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A with factory
applied ASJ-SSL vapor barrier jacket with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
Provide one of the following:
1. Owens Corning; Evolution Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
23 00 86-6
2. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok Pipe Insulation.
3. Knauf; Earthwool 1000 degree Pipe Insulation.
J. Piping Insulation Type P2: Flexible Elastomeric Pipe Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or
expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
Provide one of the following:
1. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex
2. Aeroflex USA Inc; Aerocel
3. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
K. Piping Insulation Type P3: Handicap Lavatory and Sink Piping Insulation Kit:
1. Handicap lavatory and sink drain piping, P-trap, cold and hot water assemblies and
valves shall be insulated with fully molded insulation kit specifically designed for
handicap lavatories and sinks. ADA conforming.
2. Material shall be 3/16" thick molded closed cell vinyl with nylon fasteners, white
finish and be self-extinguishing per ASTM D635, with K value of 1.17
BTU/in./hr./sq. ft./deg. F.
L. Piping Insulation Type P4: Preformed Cellular Glass: Comply with ASTM C 585, ASTM
C 450. Provide one of the following:
1. Pittsburgh Corning; Foamglas
2.04. FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
M. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands
by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe. Provide one of the following:
1. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc; Mast-A-Fab.
2. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.05. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
N. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
O. Piping Jacket Type J1: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; 40 mil thickness, roll stock ready for shop or field cutting
and forming. Provide factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket. Provide one of the
following
1. Johns Manville; Zeston.
23 00 86-7
2. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke
P. Piping Jacket Type J2: Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005,
3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. Provide factory-fabricated fitting covers or field fabricate
covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. Provide one of the
following:
1. Provide Childers Brand Metal Jacketing Systems.
2. Provide shop fabricated smooth aluminum jacket 0.016".
2.06. TAPES
Q. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
R. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic
adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 6 mils.
3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 500 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
2.07. INSULATION INSERTS
S. Provide insert between support shield and piping on piping 1 1/2" diameter or larger.
Inserts shall be factory fabricated of heavy density insulating material suitable for
temperature. Insulation inserts shall not be less than the following lengths:
1. 1 1/2" to 2 1/2" pipe size 10" long
23 00 86-8
2. 3" to 6" pipe size 12" long
3. 8" to 10" pipe size 16" long
4. 12" and over 22" long
2.08. PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
T. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
U. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
V. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.
W. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM
C449/C449M.
X. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
Y. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
Z. Banding:
1. Aluminum bands, 3/4" x 0.02 inches
2. Stainless Steel, 304, 3/4" by 0.02 inches
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01. PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean all surfaces to be insulated as required to remove all oil, grease, loose
scale, rust, and foreign matter. Piping shall be completely dry at the time of application.
Insulating piping where condensate is occurring is unacceptable. Wet insulation is
unacceptable and shall be removed and replaced before acceptance by the Owner.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with trade installing heat trace. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage before applying insulation.
3.02. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
D. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,
referenced standards, and shall conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
23 00 86-9
E. Installation of insulation and jacket materials shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published instructions.
F. Handle and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in the absence
of specific instructions herein.
G. On exposed piping, locate insulation cover seams with the ridge of the lap joint is directed
down.
H. Provide dams in insulation at intervals not to exceed 20 feet on cold piping systems to
prevent migration of condensation or fluid leaks. Indicate visually where the dams are
located for maintenance personnel to identify and also provide dams at butt joints of
insulation at fittings, flanges, valves, and hangers.
I. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
J. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
K. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
L. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
M. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
N. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
O. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
P. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
Q. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
23 00 86-10
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by
insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and
shield.
R. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and
wet and dry film thicknesses.
S. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing
lap.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's
written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints
and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
T. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
U. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
V. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
W. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
23 00 86-11
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.03. PENETRATIONS
X. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top
of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Y. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
Z. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing
at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
AA. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
BB. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Comply with
requirements in Section 15050 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
CC. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
23 00 86-12
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Section 15050."
3.04. GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
DD. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
EE. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams,
voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and
uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation
to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond
pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining
pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the
bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining
pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one
pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily
removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a
removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design
that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
23 00 86-13
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather
mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing
mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, install fitted PVC cover
over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC
end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket where concealed unions, check valve or
piping specialties are insulated. Provide descriptive label at device under the
insulation. For example at each union stencil with the word "union." Match size
and color of pipe labels.
FF. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature
taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes.
Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
GG. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to
the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover
in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible
with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union
cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with
insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel
second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
23 00 86-14
3.05. INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
HH. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
II. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
JJ. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
KK. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and
to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air
to surface being insulated.
3.06. INSTALLATION OF GLASS-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
LL. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
23 00 86-15
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, secure tabs
with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and
seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
MM. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference
of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
NN. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure
insulation materials with bands.
OO. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation
when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
23 00 86-16
3.07. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
PP. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
QQ. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.08. FINISHES
RR. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
SS. Do not field paint aluminum jackets.
3.09. PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION SCHEDULE
Service Insulation
Type
Location Jacket
Type
Pipe Size Insulation
Thickness
by Pipe
Size
COLD PIPING
Chilled Water P1 Interior
Concealed
-- 3.0" and
smaller
1.0"
4.0" and
larger
1.5"
Cooling Coil Condensate P2 Interior
Concealed
-- 3.0" and
smaller
0.5"
Branch Lines 4.0" and
larger
0.75"
Cooling Coil Condensate Interior Exposed J1 3.0" and
smaller
0.5"
Drain Main Lines 4.0" and
larger
0.75"
END OF SECTION 23 0086
23 00 90-1
SECTION 23 0090 - SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDED
A. Inserts, Anchors, and Upper Attachments
B. Pipe Hangers, Rods, Supports, and Accessories
C. Fabricated Steel Support
1.02. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design of pipe supporting elements shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1
B. Fabrication and installation of pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with the
following Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) Standards:
1. SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Materials, Design and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Selection and Application.
3. SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Fabrication and Installation Practices.
C. Steel angles, channels and plate shall be in accordance with ASTM A36, red primed or
hot dipped galvanized for interior applications and hot galvanized for exterior
applications.
D. Bolts, including nuts and washers, used for fabricating steel members shall be in
accordance with ASTM A325 and shall be stainless steel or plated for corrosion
protection. Plain steel components are unacceptable.
E. Welding of steel members shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
F. Steel supports for ducts, pipe anchors, pipe guides, and piping supported from below
shall be fabricated in accordance with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for buildings. If required, the Contractor shall include
the cost of the services of a structural engineer to design or review the system.
1.03. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Applicable sections of the publications listed below form a part of this Section. The
publications are referenced by the basic designation only.
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
4. American Welding Society (AWS)
5. The Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
23 00 90-2
(MSS)
6. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA)
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit schedule indicating type of hanger to be used by system and pipe size. Include
rod size for each hanger size.
B. Product data, along with installation operation and maintenance instructions, shall be
included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Provide shop drawings for fabricated steel supports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Inserts, Anchors, and Upper Attachments:
1. Anvil International, Inc.
2. Carpenter Paterson, Inc.
3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
4. Elecen Metal Products
5. Hilti
6. Unistrut
7. ITW Red Head
B. Pipe Hangers, Rods, Supports and Accessories:
1. Anvil International, Inc.
2. Carpenter Paterson, Inc.
3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
4. Elcen Metal Products
5. Hilti
6. Unistrut
C. Fabricated Steel Support: As indicated on Drawings.
2.02. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Supports capable of supporting the pipe for all service and testing conditions. Provide 4-
to-1 safety factor.
23 00 90-3
B. Allow free expansion and contraction of the piping to prevent excessive stress resulting
from service and testing conditions or from weight transferred from the piping or
attached equipment.
C. Design supports and hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes.
D. For chemical and waste piping, design, materials of construction, and installation of
pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints, and anchors:
1. ASME B31.3.
2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
3. Except where modified by this Specification.
E. For steam and hot and cold water piping, design, materials of construction and
installation pipe hangers, supports, guides, restraints and anchors:
1. ASME B31.1
2. MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
F. Check all physical clearances between piping, support system, and structure. Provide
for vertical adjustment after erection.
G. Support vertical pipe runs in pipe chases at base of riser. Support pipes for lateral
movement with clamps or brackets.
H. Place hangers on outside of pipe insulation. Use a pipe covering protection saddle for
insulated pipe at support point.
I. Fabricated Steel Supports: As detailed on the drawings.
2.03. INSERTS AND ANCHORS
A. Inserts: MSS Type 18; malleable iron body and nut, galvanized finish, opening in top of
insert for reinforcing rod, lateral adjustable.
B. Anchors: Steel shell and expander plug, snap off end fastener
2.04. HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and around
piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.
B. For suspension of non-insulated or insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable steel
clevices, MSS Type I.
C. For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipe lines: Adjustable band hangers, MSS
Type 7 or 9; or split pipe rings, MSS Type II.
D. For support of piping where horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction
may occur, and where a low coefficient of friction is desired: Pipe slides and slide
plates, MSS Type 35, including guided plate mounted on a concrete pedestal or
structural steel support.
23 00 90-4
E. For support from floor stanchion, using floor flange to secure stanchion to floor:
Adjustable pipe stanchion saddles, MSS Type 37 or 38, including steel pipe base
support and cast-iron floor flange.
F. For suspension of pipe from two (2) rods where longitudinal movement due to
expansion and contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.
G. For suspension of pipe from a single rod where horizontal movement due to expansion
and contraction may occur: Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43.
H. For support of pipe from a single rod where vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe
roll stands, MSS Type 45.
I. For support of pipe where small horizontal movement due to expansion and contraction
may occur, but vertical adjustment is not necessary: Pipe rolls and plates, MSS Type 45.
J. For support of pipe lines where vertical and lateral adjustment during installation may
be required in addition to provision for expansion and contraction: Adjustment pipe
rolls stands, MSS Type 46.
2.05. VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS
A. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit size of bare pipe.
B. For support and steadying of pipe risers: Two-bolt riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or 42.
2.06. HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS
A. Select size of hanger rod attachments to suit hanger rods.
B. For adjustment up to six (6) inches for heavy loads: Steel turnbuckles, MSS Type 13.
C. For use on high temperature piping installations: Steel clevices, MSS Type 14.
D. For use with split pipe rings, MSS Type II: Swivel turnbuckles, MSS Type15.
E. For attaching hanger rod to various types of building attachments: Malleable iron
sockets, MSS Type 16 or 17.
F. Rods:
1. Size 3/8" and up: All thread steel rod electro galvanized. Sizing for pipe or
equipment support as follows:
Copper Tube, Plastic Steel, Cast Iron
Pipe Size (Copper,
Plastic)
Pipe Size (Steel,
Cast Iron)
Rod Size Max. Equip. Load
1/4" to 2" 1/4" to 2" 3/8" 730 lbs.
2-1/2" to 4" 2-1/2" to 3" 1/2" 1,350 lbs.
6" 4" 5/8" 2,160 lbs.
8" to 12" 6" 3/4" 3,230 lbs.
23 00 90-5
14" 8" to 12" 7/8" 4,480 lbs.
16" 14" to 16" 1" 5,900 lbs.
18" to 20" 18" to 20" 1-1/4" 9,500 lbs.
22" to 42" 22" to 42" 1-1/2" 13,800 lbs.
2. Rods may be reduced one size for double rod hangers with 3/8" minimum
diameter, or when other paragraphs require a minimum of 2 hangers per section,
provided the minimum diameter of 3/8" is maintained.
G. For upper attachment for suspending pipe hangers from concrete: Concrete inserts MSS
Type 18.
H. For attachment to top flange of structural shape: Top beam C-clamps, MSS Type 19.
I. For attachment to bottom flange of structural shape: Side beam or channel clamps, MSS
Type 20 or 27.
J. For attachment to center of bottom flange of beams: Center beam clamps, MSS Type
21.
K. For attachment to bottom of beams where heavy loads are encountered and hanger rod
sizes are large: Welded attachments, MSS Type 22.
L. For attachment to structural shapes: C-clamps, MSS Type 23.
M. For attachment to top of beams when hanger rod is required tangent to edge of flange:
Top I-beams clamps, MSS Type 25.
N. For attachment to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads: Steel I-beam/WF-beam
clamps with eye nut, MSS Type 28 or 29.
O. Steel brackets, for indicated loading:
1. Light duty, 750 pounds, MSS Type 31.
2. Medium duty, 1,500 pounds, MSS Type 32.
3. Heavy duty, 3,000 pounds, MSS Type 33.
P. For use on sides of steel beams: Side beam brackets, MSS Type 34.
2.07. SPRING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Select spring hangers and supports to suit pipe size and loading.
B. For control of piping movement: Restraint control devices, MSS Type 47.
C. For light loads where vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inch: Springs cushion
hangers, MSS Type 48.
D. For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs: Spring cushion roll hangers, MSS Type
49.
23 00 90-6
E. For retardation of sway or thermal expansion in piping systems: Spring way braces, MSS
Type 50.
F. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger: Variable spring
hangers, MSS Type 51; preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25%.
G. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from base support: Variable
spring base supports, MSS Type 52; preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25%; include flange.
H. For absorbing expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support:
Variable spring trapeze hangers, MSS Type 53; preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25%.
I. Constant supports: Provide one of the following types, selected to suit piping system.
Include auxiliary stops for erection and hydrostatic test, and field load-adjustment
capability.
1. Horizontal Type: MSS Type 54.
2. Vertical Type: MSS Type 55.
3. Trapeze Type: MSS Type 56.
2.08. SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORTS
A. Where support spacing is more frequent than distance between structural members,
provide steel angles, channels or beams sized to provide a deflection of less than 1/240
of span when fully loaded, to transfer pipe support loads to structural members.
B. Where deflection of center of trapeze support exceeds 1/240 of distance between hanger
rods, provide additional hanger rods.
C. Where multiple risers are supported within shafts, provide steel angles, channels or
beams, sized to provide a deflection of less than 1/240 of span when fully loaded, to
transfer loads to the concrete floor slab. Anchor supplemental supports to the slab, and
provide resilient element where required by other Sections of this Division.
2.09. ACCESSORIES
A. Protective Shields, MSS Type 40: Carbon steel, galvanized minimum of 12" length
sized for required insulation.
B. Protective Saddles, MSS Type 39: Carbon steel plate, minimum of 12" length, sized for
required insulation.
C. Steel Turnbuckle, MSS Type 13: Forges steel, galvanized finish with locknuts. Rated at
a minimum of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.
D. Steel Clevis, MSS Type 14: Forged steel, galvanized finish with steel pin and cotter pin.
Rated for a minimum of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.
E. Weldless Eye Nut, MSS Type 17: Forges steel, galvanized finish. Rated for a minimum
23 00 90-7
of 730 lbs. at 3/8" size.
2.10. PIPE INSULATION HANGER SHIELDS
A. Where hangers are placed outside the jackets of pipe insulation, provide shields equal to
"Thermal Hanger Shields" as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc. or equivalent by Elcen
Metal Products Company.
B. Shields shall consist of a 360-degree insert of high-density, 100 psi, waterproof calcium
silicate, encased in a 360-degree galvanized sheet steel shield. Insert shall be same
thickness as adjoining pipe insulation, and shall extend 1 inch beyond sheet metal shield
in each direction on cold lines. Shield lengths and minimum sheet metal gauges shall be
as directed below:
PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE
1/2" to 1-1/2" 4" 26
2" to 6" 6" 20
8" to 10" 9" 16
12" to 18" 12" 16
20" & Larger 18" 16
C. Shields shall be Model CS-CW, except for pipe roller applications: then provide Model
CSX-CW.
D. At the Contractor's option, shop-fabricated galvanized metal shields may be provided
based on approved shop drawings. Length and gauge of sheet metal shall be as specified
above.
E. For all insulated piping 4” and larger, provide insulation insert at a minimum of 12”
long. Insert shall extend a minimum of one inch beyond shield. Insulation inserts shall
be minimum 12” long section of foam glass insulation.
2.11. METAL FRAMING: Provide products compliant with NEMA ML-1.
2.12. STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS: Provide products compliant with
ANSI/ASTM A-36.
2.13. PIPE GUIDES: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy
fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two-section outer cylinder and base, with a
two-section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe or as shown on Drawings. Size guides
and spiders to clear pipe, cylinder and insulation, if any. Provide guides of length
recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Where applicable, install in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation
23 00 90-8
instructions.
B. Where supports are in contact with copper pipe, provide copper plated support.
C. Where supports are in contact with glass, aluminum or brass pipe, provide plastic
coating on supports.
D. Interior hangers, supports, including attachments, that are plain steel shall be primed
and painted.
E. Hangers and supports, including attachments, exposed to weather or located in utility
tunnels or accessible utility trenches or subject to spillage shall be hot dip galvanized
after fabrication.
F. Fabricated steel supports exposed to weather or located in utility tunnels and accessible
utility trenches or subject to spillage shall be primed and painted. Cut, welded, drilled or
otherwise damaged surfaces of coating shall be repaired.
3.02. PREPARATION
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building
structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct
inadequacies including but not limited to proper placement of inserts, anchors and other
building structural attachments.
3.03. INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from
building structure in compliance with MSS SP-69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs
of horizontal piping to be supported together in trapeze-type hangers where possible.
Install supports with maximum spacing as specified in this Section. Where piping of
various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for small diameter pipe. Do no use wire or
perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs,
install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar
piping.
C. Support fire protection water piping independently of other piping
D. The location of hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the structural work to
ensure that the structural members will support the intended load.
E. Provide hex head nut on rod at top and bottom of clevis hanger yoke, and at each rod
connection to intermediate und upper attachment. Rod nuts shall be securely locked in
place.
F. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. Where lateral or axial movement is
anticipated, use suitable linkage in hanger rod to permit swing.
G. Hangers shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after erection while still
23 00 90-9
supporting the load. Turnbuckles shall be provided where required for vertical
adjustment of the piping.
H. Supports for vertical piping shall be located at each floor or at intervals of not more than
15 feet and at intervals of not more than 8 feet from end of risers. Where supports are
provided on intermediate floors spaced 15 feet or less between floors, no additional
supports are required other than those specified for end of risers.
I. A hanger or support shall be provided adjacent to each piece of equipment to ensure
that none of the pipe weight is supported from the equipment.
J. Provide protective shields on all piping required to be insulated.
K. Provide protective saddles sized to match insulation thickness on all hot piping required
to be insulated. Fill void between saddle and pipe with insulation as specified.
L. Provide turnbuckles on all hangers that require leveling or aligning.
M. Provide steel clevis where detailed and/or required.
N. Provide weldless eye nuts on hanger terminations where disassembly or swing may be
required. Use in combination with steel clevis.
O. Supports
1. Provide additional supports at:
a. Changes in direction.
b. Branch piping and runouts over 5 feet.
c. Concentrated loads due to valves, strainers and similar items.
d. At valves 4 inches and larger in horizontal piping.
e. Support piping on each side of valve.
f. Brace hubless piping to prevent horizontal and vertical movement.
g. Where number of grooved couplings exceeds 3 between supports or provide
continuous steel between supports.
2. Sanitary waste and vent, roof drains per UPC Section 316: Vertical supports are
not required within 2.5 feet of wall penetrations for pipes 8 inches in diameter and
smaller, and not more than 3 feet for 10 inches and larger.
3. Other piping support spacing shall be as scheduled on Drawing or as required by
referenced standard.
3.04. HANGER SPACING
A. The maximum spacing between pipe supports for straight runs shall be in accordance
with the following chart. If any deviation from the table exists within the manufacturer's
written installation instruction, whichever spacing reflecting the smaller centerline to
centerline dimension shall be used.
23 00 90-10
MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING
TABLE
1. Steel Pipe (Schedule 40 & 80):
Up to 1" ..................................7 ft. on center
1-1/4" and greater ...................10 ft. on center
2. Copper Pipe (Types L, K and M):
Up to 1" size: ..........................5 ft. on center
1-1/4" to 2-1/2" ......................7 ft. on center
3" and larger ...........................10 ft. on center
3. Ductile Iron and Cast Iron: Two hangers per section length.
4. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC):
Up to 1-1/2" ...........................3 ft. on center
2" to 4" ...................................4 ft. on center
5" to 8" ...................................5 ft. on center
10" and larger .........................6 ft. on center
5. Sprinkler and Standpipe: Pipe hangers to be as per NFPA-13 and NFPA-
14 standards.
B. Hanger centerline spacing shall be reduced by 50% in areas of concentrated valves
and/or fittings, also no more than a maximum distance of 12 inches from valves, fittings
and/or couplings, or 24 inches from a change in direction.
3.05. ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE
A. For plain steel devices, prime and paint.
B. Adjust attachment location for proper alignment and no more than 4 degrees offset from
a perpendicular alignment.
C. If proper alignment cannot be achieved from the existing building structure, provide a
trapeze type support sized to handle the design load with a minimum safety factor of 5.
3.06. INSERTS
A. Contractor shall have inserts at site and dimensional location drawings ready at the
beginning of the involved concrete work.
B. Install inserts by securing to concrete forms and inserting reinforcing rod through the
opening provided in the insert in accordance with shop drawings.
C. Provide necessary supervision while concrete is being poured to correct any
misalignment caused by the concrete.
3.07. INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by
ANSI B-31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bards to piping and to
23 00 90-11
structure. Comply with ANSI B-31, with AWS standards, and with the Details shown
on the drawings.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to limit movement of piping and
forces to maximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.
D. Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
Make provisions for preset of anchors as required, accommodating both expansion and
contraction of piping.
E. Size anchor shell length to assure a minimum of 1" solid concrete remaining from shell
and to concrete face.
3.08. INSTALLATION OF TRAPEZES OR PIPE RACKS
A. Light/Medium Duty: Assemble from standard manufactured metal framing systems, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Heavy Duty: Fabricate from structural steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld
steel in accordance with AWS standards.
3.09. AUXILIARY STEEL
A. Furnish all miscellaneous structural members necessary to hang or support ductwork,
piping, and mechanical equipment.
B. Notify Engineer of any adjustment necessary in main structural system for proper
support of major equipment.
C. Fabricated Steel Supports: Steel for supports shall be saw cut, with sharp edges ground
smooth. After fabrication, remove all foreign material, including welding slag and
spatter, and leave ready for painting.
END OF SECTION
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 20-1
SECTION 23 0120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 Specific requirements for specialties indicated on drawings or in other sections of these
specifications shall take precedence over items as specified in this section.
1.02 Submit brochures and other supportive product data for all items.
1.03 Ranges for thermometer, gages, or similar instruments shall be selected so that normal
operation will be near center of scale. Range shall not be longer than required. Use
compound gage where vacuum may be encountered.
1.04 Combination instruments for thermometers and gages will not be acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 THERMOMETERS:
A. Thermometers shall be equal to Trerice Series BX9, 9-inch, adjustable type. Stem length
shall be a minimum of 3/4 of the pipe diameter, plus well extension length. Use 12-inch
stem length in tanks.
B. Provide brass wells and stems.
2.02 THERMOMETER WELLS:
A. Provide wells with extension neck for insulated piping.
B. Wells shall be Trerice Series 138 type.
C. Test wells to be Trerice Series 169 type with cap and chain.
2.03 GAGES:
A. Gages shall be equal to Trerice Series 800, 3-1/2-inch size.
B. Provide snubber and cock for each gage.
C. Provide coil syphon and cock for each steam gage.
D. Gauges shall be liquid filled.
2.04 TEST PLUGS:
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 20-2
A. Test plugs shall be equal to Peterson Engineering Company #110, 1/4" size, with brass
body, dust cap and "Nordel" valve core material.
2.05 STRAINER:
A. "Y" Type (Haywood, Muessco, or Sarco):
1. 1/2" through 2": Haywood Model 80, bronze, 300 lb. WP, 500 lb. WOG or
Haywood Model 80 iron body, 250 lb. WP, 900 lb. WOG. Provide Monel or
stainless steel screen, blow-off outlet, screwed ends.
2. 2-1/2" through 12": Haywood Model 80 iron body, 125 lb. SWP, 175 lb. WOG,
brass screen, blow-off outlet, flanged ends.
B. Screens - Steam:
1. Monel or stainless steel.
2. Perforations - .057 diameter, 144 per sq. in.
C. Screens - Water:
1. Brass.
2. Perforations: Up to 2" - 1/10" diameter, 49 per sq. in.; 2-1/2" to 4" - 1/8" diameter,
32 per sq. in.; 5" up - 1/4" diameter, 8 per sq. in.
2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:
A. Pumps and Chillers: Bellows Type 3, equal to Keflex #151-TR-1250, with 150 lb.
flanges and tie rods. 150 psig maximum working pressure. 304 stainless steel. Bellows
welded to flanges. Tie rods with chatter proof spacers. Unit rated at 800°F.
B. Coils, Valves, And Miscellaneous Equipment: Stainless steel braided hose type.
2.07 ELECTRICAL HEAT TAPE:
A. Heat tape shall be equal to Emerson Chromalox.
B. Electrical heat tape shall be installed where indicated on the drawings to prevent pipe
freezing.
C. Heat tape shall be approved for use in hazardous areas as indicated and U.L. listed.
2.08 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVE:
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 20-3
A. For valves 2” and smaller:
1. Bronze body.
2. Ball or globe type.
3. 250 psig at 250° F rating.
4. Threaded ends.
5. Calibrated orifice or venturi.
6. Meter connections with integral seals.
7. Memory stop.
B. For valves 2-1/2” and larger:
1. Iron or steel body.
2. Ball or globe type.
3. 125 psig at 250° F rating.
4. Flanged connection.
5. Calibrated orifice or venturi.
6. Meter connections with integral seals.
7. Memory stop.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Flow Design
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Taco
4. Armstrong
5. Nibco
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GAGES, THERMOMETERS, AND TEST PLUGS:
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 20-4
A. Provide thermometers in inlet and outlet piping of chillers, boilers, water heaters, air
handling unit coils, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
B. Provide gages on inlet and outlet piping of all pumps, except domestic hot water
circulators, steam gages on boiler headers, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
C. Arrange thermometers and gages so they might be read standing in a normal position on
the floor.
D. Provide test plugs on inlet and outlet piping of all heat exchanger equipment not equipped
with thermometers. This includes all heating and cooling coils in air handling units, fan
coil units, and other terminal devices with coils.
E. Locate gages, thermometers, and test plugs as close as possible to equipment being
monitored.
3.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS:
A. Install flexible pipe connectors where indicated on the drawings.
B. Install connectors as close as possible to equipment inlets and outlets.
C. Support pipe work independently of flexible connectors. Brace and anchor piping as
required to prevent movement of piping ends of flexible connectors and align all
equipment, pipe work, and flanges so that no flexible connectors shall be misaligned
and/or stressed beyond the manufacturer's recommended maximum limits.
3.03 HEAT TAPE:
A. Install the heat tape below the pipe insulation in a uniform distribution to obtain the
watts/linear foot as indicated.
B. Wiring installation shall be done in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer's
requirements.
C. Power for heat tape shall come from an emergency circuit. If no emergency circuit is
available, the power shall come from a dedicated circuit, marked heat tape in the panel.
D. Unless indicated otherwise on the plans, install heat tape with a minimum capacity of 5
watts/foot.
E. Heat tape shall be thermostatically controlled and shall be preset to energize before
freezing. An indicator light shall energize when the heat tape is "on."
END OF SECTION
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-1
SECTION 23 01 50 MECHANICAL HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This Section includes piping for heating water, chilled-water, make-up water,
and associated drain piping.
B. Provide materials suitable for system pressures and temperatures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe, fitting, and specialty indicated.
B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and
personnel.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: Include hydronic specialties in maintenance manuals.
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations, for
exterior walls and floor assemblies.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related
Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base.
F. Coordinate with requirements for fire stopping.
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-2
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver, store, and protect piping and devices.
B. Maintain hydronic specialties in shipping containers with labeling left in place.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.
D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
F. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
G. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).
H. ProPress Mechanical Joints, or equal.
2.02 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B, Schedule 40,
black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B,
Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, NPS 14 through NPS36: ASTM A 53, ERW, Grade B, standard
weight, black steel, plain ends.
D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black
steel; ERW.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250.
F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-3
G. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
H. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125,
and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match
adjoining pipe.
J. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material
group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
2.03 PEX PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PEX Distribution System: PEX-a Piping, ASTM F 877, SDR 9 tubing
B. Fittings for PEX Tube: ASTM F 1960, cold expansion fittings with PEX
Reinforcing Rings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Chilled Water and Heating Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type L drawn-temper
copper tubing with soldered joints, or Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded
joints.
B. Chilled Water and Heating Water, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel
pipe with welded and flanged joints.
C. Equipment Drains: Same as hydronic system connected to equipment, DWV
copper, SCH 80 PVC, or clear vinyl tubing.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying
insulation and servicing of valves.
B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short
NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-4
elsewhere as required for system drainage.
C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to new mains using tee
fittings in main pipe. Use forged tees or forged weld-o-lets for branch
connections to existing mains.
F. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install
anchors at minimum of 300 linear feet.
G. Route piping plumb and square with the building structure.
H. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space
and other work.
I. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and
location of access doors.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building faming,
scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
M. Install with proper access around device for service clearance.
N. Set and level all floor mounted equipment.
O. For systems requiring drains, install drain and route to nearest drainage point
or as indicated on the drawings.
P. Make-up water and relief:
1. For each system, provide pressure-reducing valve for feeding make-
up water and a pressure relief valve.
2. Provide make-up water from nearest domestic water with reduced
pressure backflow preventer.
3. Operating pressures of PRV and relief valves shall be determined by
required system pressures.
3.04 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-5
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for
examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical,
isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment,
its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without
damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher
than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or
other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is
risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers
and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to
release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete
draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and
that system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than
1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component
in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
EDUCATION BUILDING
SAU MAGNOLIA 23 01 50-6
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 4 hours,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks
by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system
balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced
position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are
installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air
completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of chilled water and hot water
systems.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.07 CLEANING: Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and
clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping
systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in
pump suction diffusers.
END OF SECTION 23 01 50
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-1
SECTION 23 0160 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Provide required insulation for HVAC ductwork and plumbing piping.
1.02 All ductwork and piping is insulated unless otherwise noted.
1.03 SUBMITTTALS
A. Submit product data for each system. Product data shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Insulation material and thickness
3. Jacket
4. Adhesives
5. Fastening methods
6. Fitting materials
7. Manufacturer's data sheets indicating density, thermal characteristics, temperature
ratings
8. Insulation installation details (manufacturer's installation instructions/details,
Contractor's installation details, MICA plates where applicable)
9. Other appropriate data
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All ductwork and piping requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and
as required for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that
specified and materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.
B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these
systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50
smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for
guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a
specific product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to
this requirement. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor's
submittal data for this Section of the Specifications. No material may be used that, when
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-2
tested by the ASTM E84-89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a
degree that the continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an
artificially low flame spread rating.
C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section
must have a minimum of three (3) years' experience specializing in the trade.
D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and
regularly engaged in such occupation.
E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with
adequate factory-printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly,
inadequate, damaged or water-soaked Work will not be acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. CertainTeed Corporation.
B. Johns Manville Corporation.
C. Knauf Corporation.
D. Owens-Corning.
E. Unifrax 1 LLC (FyreWrap).
F. Armacell
2.03 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Type D1: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C553 and ASTM C1290; commercial grade; 'k'
value of 0.25 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft
facing for air ducts.
B. Type D2: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0
lb/cu ft minimum density; 0.002 inch foil scrim kraft facing for air ducts.
C. Type D3: Ductliner (to be used in return air sound boots only), flexible glass fiber;
ASTM C1071; Type II, ‘k’ value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density;
coating air side for maximum 4,000 feet per minute air velocity. The airstream surface
must be protected with a durable acrylic surface coating specifically formulated to:
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-3
1. Be no more corrosive than sterile cotton when tested in accordance with the test
method for corrosiveness in ASTM C665.
2. Absorb no more than 3 percent by weight when tested in accordance with the test
method for moisture vapor sorption in ASTM C1104.
3. Not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, when tested in accordance with the
test method for fungi resistance in ASTM C1071, ASTM C1338, ASTM G21, and
ASTM G22.
4. Show no signs of warpage, cracking, delaminating, flaming, smoking, glowing, or
any other visibly negative changes when tested in accordance with the test method
for temperature resistance in ASTM C411.
5. Have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or
less when tested in accordance with the test method for surface burning in ASTM
E 84.
6. Meet the sound absorption requirements when tested in accordance with the test
method for sound absorption in ASTM C423.
7. Show no evidence of continued erosion, cracking, flaking, peeling, or
delamination when tested in accordance with the test method for erosion
resistance in UL181.
D. Type D4: Fire Rated Grease Duct Insulation (High Temperature Flexible Blanket); 1-
1/2-inch thick refractory grade fibrous fire barrier material with minimum service
temperature design of 2,000 degrees F; aluminum foil laminated on both sides; with a
minimum ‘k’ value of 0.25 and a minimum density of 6 lbs/cu ft; containing no
asbestos. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) UL to meet
ASTM E 2336, ASTM E119, and with flame spread/smoke minimum rating of 25 / 50
when tested as per ASTM E84/UL 723.
E. Type D5: Outdoor Duct Insulation (Closed Cell Flexible Elastomeric Insulation); 1 inch
thick material that has a service temperature range from –60 degrees F to 180 degrees F.
This outdoor duct insulation meets ASTM C 177 or C 518 and shall have minimum ‘k’
value of 0.27 Btu-in. / hr-ft2- degrees F at minimum density measurement of 3 lb/cu ft.
The insulation and outside surface must be protected with a white Thermo Plastic
Rubber Membrane formulated to:
1. Be resistant to UV, and ozone, acid rain, and physical elements produced from
outdoor weather per ASTM E 96 Procedure A.
2. Have aflame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or
less when tested in accordance with the test method for surface burning in ASTM
E 84.
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-4
3. Show no evidence of continued erosion, delaminating, cracking, flaking, or
peeling when tested in accordance with the test method for erosion resistance in
UL181. Be resistant to mold growth resistance, ASTM G 21/C 1338 resistant to
fungi, and resistant to bacteria growth per ASTM G 22.
F. Type D6: Ductliner (to be used in return air sound boots only), flexible glass fiber;
ASTM C1071; Type II, ‘k’ value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 3.0 lb/cu ft minimum density;
coating air side for maximum 4,000 feet per minute air velocity. The airstream surface
must be protected with a durable polyacrylate copolymer emulsion specifically
formulated to:
1. Not support the growth of fungus or bacteria, when tested in accordance with the
test method for fungi resistance in ASTM D 5590 with “0” growth rating.
2. Act as a fungicidal protective coating: water based, VOC < 50 g/l. Fungicidal
coating must be EPA registered for use in HVAC duct systems. Manufacturer:
H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc., Foster 40-20 (white) or 40-30 (black)
Fungicidal Protective Coating or approved equal. Coatings may also be used to
repair damage to duct liner insulation.
G. High Density Duct Insulation Insert, see Type D2.
2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Waterproof vapor barrier type, meeting requirements of ASTM C916;
Childers CP-82 or Foster 85-20/85-60.
B. Weather Barrier: Breather Mastic: Childers CP-10/CP-11 or Foster 46-50 White.
C. Vapor Barrier Coating: Permeance - ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.08 perm or less at 45-
mil dry film thickness, tested at 100F and 50%RH; Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34
1. When higher humidity levels may be of concern, only specify the following
fungus/mold resistant coating: Foster 30-80 AF (anti-fungal). Coating must meet
ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating**
D. Reinforcing Mesh: 10x10 or 9x8 glass mesh; Foster Mast a Fab or Childers #10
E. Jacket: Pre-sized glass cloth, minimum 7.8 oz/sq yd.
F. Type D4 Insulation Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, Childers CP-82 or Foster
85-20.
G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.
H. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
I. Tie Wire and Wire Mesh: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-5
J. Stainless Steel Banding: 3/4-inch wide, minimum 22 gage, 304 stainless.
K. Armaflex 520, 520 BLV, or Foster 85-75 contact adhesive.
L. Armatuff 25 white seal seam tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The application of all insulation shall be performed by experienced mechanics,
regularly employed in the trade, in a neat and workmanlike manner. Unless otherwise
specified to a greater quality, the application of all insulation shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Omit insulation from the following items:
1. Exposed plated plumbing pipe.
2. Vents to atmosphere, discharge from safety and relief valves, overflow pipes, and hot
only drain pipes.
3. Valves, unions, flanges, traps, strainers, and devices in HOT ONLY piping.
C. Foil-Faced (FF) Duct Insulation shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B.
D. All exposed ends of pipe insulation shall be pointed up neatly with appropriate
insulating cement, or use pre-molded PVC end caps on cold only piping and preformed
aluminum end caps on dual-temp, hot or steam piping.
E. Provide high density insert at duct hangers. Maintain vapor barrier between insulation
and duct hanger. Do not insulate duct hangers or supports.
3.02 DUCT AND PIPE PREPARATION
A. Verify that piping and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
C. Maintain required ambient temperature during and after installation for a minimum
period of 24 hours.
3.03 ARMAFLEX PIPE INSULATION
A. Apply in strict accordance with latest edition of Armstrong's "Installation Instructions to
the Contractor". Joints and seams shall be sealed moisture tight without gaps and
openings in the insulation
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-6
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,
referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
C. Extend duct insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.
D. Provide external insulation on all round ductwork connectors to ceiling diffusers and on
top of diffusers as indicated in the Ductwork Insulation Application and Thickness
Schedule and the Drawings. Secure insulation to the top of ceiling diffusers with
UL181B-FX listed polypropylene duct tape Do not insulate top of ceiling diffuser if it is
used in ceiling return air plenum or in an open space with no ceiling.
E. Flexible and Rigid fiberglass insulation (Types D1 and D2) application for exterior of
duct:
1. Secure flexible insulation jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive, tape. Tape
shall be UL181B-FX listed polypropylene duct tape.
2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use 4-inch wide strips of adhesive
on 8-inch centers and mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging.
Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier
adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to
allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
3. Insulate standing seams and stiffeners that protrude through the insulation with 1-
1/2 inch thick, unfaced, flexible blanket insulation. Cover with reinforcing mesh
and coat with vapor barrier finish coating.
4. On circumferential joints, the 2-inch flange on the facing shall be secured with
9/16 inch outward clinch steel staples on 2-inch centers, and taped with minimum
3-inch wide strip of glass fabric and finish coating.
5. Vapor seal all seams, joints, pin penetrations and other breaks with vapor barrier
coating reinforced with reinforcing mesh.
F. Duct Liner (Type D3 or D6) application for interior of return air sound boots or return
air plenums:
1. Secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of duct liner adhesive, pins and clips
not more than 18 inches on center.
2. Secure bottom of duct insulation using alternate single and double clips. The first
pin will secure the insulation and the second clip will be used to secure the
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-7
cladding. Isolate the exterior clip from the cladding by using two 1/8 inch closed
cell neoprene (Armaflex) washers on either side of the cladding. Predrill holes in
cladding and avoid contact with pin during installation.
3. For round duct, secure insulation with 100 percent coverage of duct liner
adhesive. Secure cladding with 3/4 inch, 0.020 inch stainless steel bands on 12-
inch centers.
4. For joints and overlaps, fold cladding to form a double thickness hem 2 inches
minimum. Seal with a non-shrink, non-hardening sealing compound.
5. Type D6: Provide fungicidal coating in air handlers ten feet on either side, first
ten feet downstream of cooling coils, ten feet downstream of mix boxes, in
mechanical rooms or as otherwise specified in potentially high humidity areas in
the duct system shall be coated with an fungicidal coating; EPA registered for use
in HVAC duct systems at a coverage rate of 80 ft2/gallon.
G. Insulation (Type D4) application for exterior of grease ducts:
1. External duct wrap system requires two (2) 1.5-inch layers of lightweight, flexible
wrap overlapped to provide an effective fire barrier. The barrier is installed in 24-
inch or 48-inch wide sections. Insulation pins are welded in certain locations to
maintain the fire barrier material up against the duct.
2. Grease duct doors to be installed so the door can be removed and re installed and
meet code requirements.
3. Install duct wrap as tested per manufacturer’s instructions to assure the duct wrap
is mechanically attached per the manufacturer’s spacing of bands or weld pins.
4. Vertical and horizontal members of the support hanger system shall be wrapped
with one layer of the insulation. Vertical and horizontal portions shall be wrapped
independent of one another. The horizontal hanger shall be removed from the
vertical support rods and wrapped and then immediately replaced so that an
adjacent horizontal support can be removed, wrapped, and reinstalled. The end of
the threaded vertical rod shall extend 6-inch past the horizontal member at the
beginning of the installation.
5. Penetrations: Where ducts penetrate fire rated walls, floors and roofs, the duct
wrap shall be used in conjunction with a firestop system that is listed by a
nationally recognized laboratory and rated for penetration of a rated wall or floor
by the fire rated grease duct system used.
H. Insulation (Type D5) application for outdoor ducts:
1. Horizontal ductwork located outdoors shall be sloped at a minimum 2-degree
angle to prevent the accumulation of water on top of the finished insulated duct.
Support members that connect directly to the ductwork are to be insulated with
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-8
this same material. Keep compression or sharp creases of outdoor insulation to a
minimum by distributing the weight of the duct resting on horizontal duct support
members.
2. Follow the insulation manufacturer’s installation instructions and procedures to
assure the ductwork is properly insulated and that the insulation will meet the
manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
I. All ductwork, accessories, and all plenums including metal and masonry construction,
etc., shall be insulated as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein and as required
for a complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equal to that specified and
materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.
J. Flexible ductwork connections to equipment shall not be insulated.
K. Where vapor barriers are required, the vapor barrier shall be on the outside. Extreme
care shall be taken that the vapor barrier is unbroken. Joints, etc., shall all be sealed.
Where insulation with a vapor barrier terminates, it shall be sealed off with the vapor
barrier being continuous to the surface being insulated. Ends shall not be left raw.
L. Extreme care shall be taken in insulating high and medium pressure ductwork including
all ductwork between the fan discharge and all mixing boxes to ensure the duct is not
pierced with sheet metal screws or other fasteners. All high and medium pressure ducts
in these Specifications are classified as high velocity ductwork.
M. Where canvas finish is specified use lagging adhesive/coating to prevent mildew in
securing canvas. Do not use wheat paste. Use only anti-fungal lagging adhesive that
adheres to ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating. (Foster 30-36AF, Childers CP-137AF).
In addition, cover all exterior canvas-covered insulation with a fire retardant weather
barrier mastic.
N. All supply ductwork in the Project shall be insulated; all exhaust and fume hood exhaust
ductwork shall not be insulated, unless used for energy recovery purposes or noted on
drawings.
O. Flexible round ducts shall be factory insulated.
3.05 INSPECTION
A. Visually inspect the completed insulation installation per manufacturers recommended
materials, procedures and repair or replace any improperly sealed joints.
B. Where there is evidence of vapor barrier failure or “wet” insulation after installation, the
damaged insulation shall be removed, duct surface shall be cleaned and dried and new
insulation shall be installed.
3.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE
MAYFLOWER CITY CENTER
& POLICE STATION 23 01 60-9
Ductwork System Application
Insulation
Type
Insulation
Thickness
Supply Air
(Hot, Cold, Combination)
Outside of Mechani-
cal Rooms D1 2"
Inside of
Mechanical Rooms D2 1-1/2"
Return Air, Relief Air, and Ex-
haust Air All D1 1"
Outside Air Treated and Untreat-
ed D1 2"
Kitchen Grease Hood Exhaust
Air All D4 3"
Duct mounted coils Inside of
Mechanical Rooms D2 2”
Terminal Unit Heating Coils All D1 2”
Supply Air Diffusers Top of Diffuser D1 2"
Supply Air Duct Outdoor Environ-
ment D5 2”
Return, Exhaust Air Duct Outdoor Environ-
ment D5 1-1/2"
Return Air Sound
Boots/Elbows/Return Air Ple-
nums
All D6 1"
END OF SECTION 23 0160
23705 -1 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
SECTION 230705
HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of high pressure ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by
requirements of this section. High pressure ductwork is hereby defined as supply
ductwork between air handling units and terminal air boxes, see drawings for pressure
classes.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects
with high pressure ductwork systems work similar to that required for project.
B. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"
for fabrication and installation of high pressure ductwork.
C. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 Equipment Volume,
Chapter 1 "Duct Construction," for fabrication and installation of high pressure ductwork.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard for the
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
E. Field Reference Manual: Have available at project field office, copy of "SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - current edition."
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications on manufactured products and
factory-fabricated ductwork and duct sealants, used for work of this section.
B. Submit duct leakage tests.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased
products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and
prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to
store outside, store above grade and enclosure with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
23705 -2 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet
steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, lock-forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A
525, G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIAL:
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork
system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15
degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45
degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch take-off connections. Where 90 degree
branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.
C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type
applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by
manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening, migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement (type
applicable for fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by
manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in
ductwork.
E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped
galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
1. Except where space is indicated as "High-Humidity area, interior support
materials of not less than 1/4" diameter or 3/16" thickness may be plain (not
galvanized).
2. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support
materials.
F. Flexible Duct: Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings semi-rigid
lightweight aluminum duct. Duct to be manufactured using a soft aluminum strip which
is spirally wound and mechanically joined. Duct to be listed under UL #181 Class 1 and
NFPA 90A. Insulation shall be 1-1/2” thick, ¾ lb. density fiberglass blanket, maximum
“K” value of 0.25 btu-in/hr.-ft-F and vapor barrier shall be metalized Mylar film. Semi-
rigid duct shall be rated for 12” positive and 12” negative static pressure. Duct to be
equal to Flexmaster Type TL-M. Vinyl or non-aluminized vapor barriers will not be
allowed. Maximum runouts shall not exceed lengths indicated on drawings.
G. Access Doors: Access doors in high velocity ducts shall be equal to Semco Type 5-3I.
Door shall be rated for installation in duct systems with pressures up to 8 in w.g. Where
required for fire dampers, door shall be furnished as a factory fabricated unit along with
extended sleeve and fire damper (installed downstream of fire reinforced corners). Door
shall be 20 gage galvanized steel sheet with 1" inch thick foil faced duct liner insulation,
sandwiched to 22 gage perforated inner liner. Door panel shall have spring clips designed
to relieve a minimum of 150 cfm at 2-1/2" negative. Panels shall be: 12" x 12" on ducts
less than 12" diameter; 12" x 18" on ducts from 12" to 24" diameter; and 18" x 18" on
ducts from 26" to 36" diameter.
23705 -3 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
2.03 FABRICATION:
A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-foot lengths, unless otherwise indicated or
required to complete runs.
B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Standards."
C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline
radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers to 30 degrees for contracting
tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.
D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent
possible.
2.04 FACTORY-FABRICATED DUCTWORK:
A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of
shop-fabricated duct and fittings.
B. Round Ductwork:
1. Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527 by the
following methods and in minimum gages listed.
DIAMETER MINIMUM GAGE METHOD OF MANUFACTURE
3" to 14" 26 Spiral Lockseam
15" to 26" 24 Spiral Lockseam
27" to 36" 22 Spiral Lockseam
37" to 50" 20 Spiral Lockseam
51" to 60" 18 Spiral Lockseam
over 60" 16 Longitudinal Seam
2. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal
seam duct.
3. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous
welds along seams.
DIAMETER MINIMUM GAGE
3" to 36" 20
38" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
C. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A
527, of spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gages listed.
MAXIMUM WIDTH MINIMUM GAGE
Under 25" 24
25" to 48" 22
49" to 70" 20
Over 70" 18
23705 -4 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
1. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous
weld along seams.
MAXIMUM WIDTH MINIMUM GAGE
Up to 8" 22
8" to 37" 20
37" to 50" 18
Over 50" 16
D. Internally Insulated Duct and Fittings: Construct with outer pressure shell, 1" thick
insulation layer, and perforated inner liner. Construct shell and liner of galvanized sheet
steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A 527, of spiral lockseam construction (use
longitudinal seam for over 59"), in minimum gages listed.
ROUND NOMINAL DUCT
DIAMETER OUTER SHELL INNER LINER
3" to 12" 26 ga. 28 ga.
13" to 24" 24 ga. 28 ga.
25" to 34" 22 ga. 28 ga.
35" to 48" 20 ga. 28 ga.
49" to 58" 18 ga. 28 ga.
Over 59" 16 ga. 28 ga.
FLAT OVAL OUTER DUCT
MAJOR AXIS OUTER SHELL INNER LINER
To 12" 26 ga. 28 ga.
13" to 24" 24 ga. 28 ga.
25" to 34" 22 ga. 28 ga.
35" to 48" 20 ga. 28 ga.
49" to 58" 18 ga. 28 ga.
1. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous
weld along seams of outer shell.
2. NOMINAL DUCT
DIAMETER OUTER SHELL INNER LINER
3" to 34" 20 ga. 20 ga.
36" to 48" 18 ga. 20 ga.
Over 48" 16 ga. 20 ga.
3. Inner Liner: Perforate with 3/32" holes for 22% open area. Provide metal
spacers welded in position to maintain spacing and concentricity.
4. Hospital grade insulation shall completely fill the 1" space between the liner and
the outer shell and shall have the following UL ratings:
Flame Spread 10-20
Fuel Contributed 10-15
Smoke Developed 10-20
23705 -5 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
5. At the end of an insulated section or run, where internally insulated duct connects
to insulated spiral duct or fittings, fire damper or flex, a manufactured insulation
end fitting shall be installed to bring the outer pressure shell down to nominal
size.
E. Fittings shall be equal to Semco Mfg., Inc. machine formed fittings as follows:
1. 90 degree elbow - 10 inch and smaller ............... E901
2. 45 degree elbow - 10 inch and smaller ................ E451
3. 90 degree elbow - over 10 inch ............................ E905
4. 45 degree elbow - over 10 inch ............................ E453
5. 90 degree conical tee ............................................ CT
6. 90 degree reducing conical tee ............................. CTR
7. 180 degree conical cross ...................................... CC
8. 180 degree conical cross, reducing .................. CCR
9. 45 degree lateral ................................................... L
10. 45 degree double lateral cross .............................. LC
11. 45 degree reducing lateral .................................... LR
12. 45 degree double reducing lateral ..................... LDR
13. Two-way "Y" ....................................................... WYE
14. Concentric Reducer.............................................. RC
15. Non-Concentric Reducer ..................................... RE
16. Coupling (Male) ................................................... CPL-M
17. Coupling (Female) ............................................... CPL-F
18. Offset ................................................................... OFF
19. Round to Oval Transition (Concentric) ............... RC
20. Round to Oval Transition (Non-Concentric) ....... RE
F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering factory-fabricated ductwork which may be incorporated in the work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. Semco, Inc.
2. McGill Airflow, LLC.
3. Spiral Pipe of Texas
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry
practices which will achieve an airtight system and noiseless (no objectionable noise)
systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum of
joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and
with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers,
and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling.
3.02 DUCT SEALING
23705 -6 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Seal supply, return and exhaust ductwork per SMACNA high pressure standards with
mastic equal to "Hard Cast" FTA-20 with DT tape for indoor use and RTA-50 with DT
tape for outdoor use.
1. Seal per SMACNA Standards to achieve airtight system.
2. Duct Seal Levels:
Duct Location Duct Type
Supply Exhaust Return
Outdoors A A A
Unconditioned Spaces A B B
Conditioned spaces (concealed ductwork) B B B
Conditioned spaces (exposed ductwork) B B B
Lab and Animal Room Exhaust A A
3. Seal Level Description:
Seal Level Sealing Requirements
A All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetration
B All transverse joints and longitudinal seams
C Transverse joints only
4. Seal ductwork, after installation, in accordance with recommendations of
SMACNA Standards.
5. All high velocity ductwork joints shall be either welded or joint shall be sealed.
6. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
a. Application Method: Brush on.
b. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
c. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
d. Water Resistant.
e. Mold and Mildew Resistant.
f. VOC: Maximum 75g/L (less water).
g. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
h. Service: Indoor or Outdoor.
i. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and
bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
7. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
a. General: Single-component, acid curing, silicone, elastomeric.
b. Type: S.
23705 -7 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
c. Grade: NS.
d. Class: 25.
e. Use: O.
B. Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as
required to avoid delays in work. Drilled expansion anchors selected and installed as
directed by manufacturer may be used. Expansion anchors shall be equal to "Phillips Red
Head", verify with structural engineer that drilled anchors are suitable for the deck
design.
C. Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and
accommodate installation requirements.
D. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and
notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts
close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-
enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for
enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where
possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Where possible
in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical
shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal
runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended
ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
F. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between
construction opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2".
G. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, install fire dampers,
provide firestopping between duct and substrate.
H. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,
equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
I. Support ductwork in manner complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Standards."
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean
external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of
metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint
deterioration.
B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has
been damaged.
23705 -8 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTWORK
C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air
distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of
polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until
time connections are to be completed.
3.04 TESTING FOR LEAKAGE:
A. General: After each duct system is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1995 Edition. Repair leaks and repeat
test until total leakage is less than limits outlined in the manual.
END OF SECTION
23 07 10-1
SECTION 23 0710 - HVAC SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE:
A. All low pressure duct work including supply, exhaust, and outside air to complete the
systems as shown on the Drawings or specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit the following:
1. Air distribution devices.
2. Life safety dampers and doors.
3. Flexible duct.
4. Flexible connections.
5. Access doors and duct access doors.
6. Turning vanes.
7. Duct take-off, fittings.
8. Roof outside air intake.
9. Duct sealants.
10. Duct leak tests.
1.03 GOVERNING PUBLICATIONS AND AUTHORITIES:
A. ASHRAE "Guide".
B. SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards".
C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
D. NFPA Pamphlets No. 90A, 90B, 91 and 96.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT MATERIALS:
A. Galvanized steel sheets shall be lock-forming quality (LFQ), shall have a galvanized
690 zinc coating of 1-1/4 oz. total for both sides of one square foot, and the gauge of
galvanized steel sheets shall be as prescribed by the latest edition of SMACNA for
pressure classification of ductwork.
B. Aluminum sheets shall be made from an aluminum base alloy having not more than
23 07 10-2
0.5% copper (for corrosion resistance), a minimum tensile strength of 16,000 psi and
the ability to satisfactorily make a Pittsburgh lock seam without splitting.
2.02 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Flexible connections shall be made on duct connections of air moving equipment
greater than 2000 CFM or as required for equipment installation.
B. Connections shall be made of 30 ounce woven glass fabric; fire-, water-, and
weather-resistant fabric equal to “Ventfab”, double coated with neoprene "Ventglas",
or equal. Canvas connections to give no less than 3" clear break between metals
jointed. Insulate with 1" minimum fiberglass duct wrap with a vapor barrier facing of
foil reinforced kraft. Seal with reinforced aluminum tape.
C. Flexible connections on exterior shall be protected from weather with sheetmetal
cover which shall be coated for protection same as ductwork.
D. Connections in high pressure systems, fume hoods, and for those exposed to the
weather shall be made from "Ventglas", neoprene coated glass fabric.
2.03 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Access doors to 16" by 24" size shall be "Ventlock" stamped insulated access doors.
B. Larger access doors shall be double panel construction with one inch thick 1.5 pcf
density rigid insulation between panels. Doors with largest dimension over 24", but
less than 48", shall use "Ventlock" series 200 latches, hinges and gasketing, and
construction shall be 22 gage galvanized steel. Doors with largest dimension over
48" shall use "Ventlock" series 300 latches, hinges and gasketing, and construction
shall be 20 gage galvanized steel.
C. Provide vision panels on access doors for fire dampers and control dampers.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT:
A. Low Pressure: furnish and install, where indicated on the drawings, flexible metal
insulated round ductwork, factory fabricated, listed under U.L. #181, Class 1 and
NFPA 90A, capable of a minimum centerline bend radius equal to duct inside
diameter. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket,
maximum "K" value of 0.25 btu-in/hr-ft5-EF., and vapor barrier shall be neoprene
coated fiberglass fabric laminated to aluminized polyester film. Flexible duct shall
be rated for 10" positive and 2" negative static pressure.
B. Vinyl or non- aluminized vapor barriers will not be allowed. Maximum runouts shall
not exceed length indicated on drawings in notes or details.
2.05 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES:
A. General:
1. All outlet grilles shall have gaskets.
2. Furnish opposed blade volume controls on all supply outlets and return
23 07 10-3
grilles.
B. Devices: Devices shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
2.06 LIFE SAFETY DAMPERS:
A. Dampers shall be equal to those manufactured by the Ruskin Corporation or
Greenheck.
B. Dampers shall be U.L. listed.
C. Fire, smoke or combination fire/smoke dampers shall be provided in rated
assemblies requiring them.
D. All dampers, methods and location of installation shall comply with the requirements
of the International Building Code, National Fire Protection Association and all
authorities having jurisdiction. In the case of discrepancies, most stringent
requirements shall dictate installation.
E. Fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with an approved means of access, large
enough to permit inspection and maintenance of the damper and its operating parts.
Access shall be provided on either side of damper assemblies.
F. Access shall not affect the integrity of fire-resistance-rated assemblies. The access
openings shall not reduce the fire-resistance rating of the assembly.
G. Provide access door minimum 12" x 12".
H. Access points shall be permanently identified on the exterior by a label having letters
not less than 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) in height reading: fire/smoke damper, smoke
damper or fire damper.
I. Access doors in ducts shall be tight fitting and suitable for the required duct
construction. Contractor shall install dampers in accordance with the following:
J. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard
555. Dampers shall have an hourly rating as indicated on the drawings, a 212°F
fusible link, and shall include a UL label.
K. All outlet grilles shall have gaskets.
L. Contractor shall furnish opposed blade volume controls on all supply outlets and
return grilles.
M. Dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the
location.
N. Manufacturer’s integral sleeves and frames may be used at the contractor's option.
O. Dampers shall be provided which are tested and rated for design duct velocity and
pressure.
P. Dampers rating shall meet or exceed the rating of the wall in which it is housed.
23 07 10-4
Q. Contractor shall install fire or smoke or combination dampers in all rated walls as
necessary to maintain the integrity of all rated walls whether indicated on the plans
or not.
2.07 ACCESSORIES:
A. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Furnish and install single thickness, multiple radius,
airfoil steel turning vanes. Static pressure loss for square ducts shall be no more than
20% of velocity head. Turning vanes shall be furnished with a mounting plate to
facilitate installation in ductwork.
B. Manual Balancing Damper:
1. Square or Rectangular: Minimum 16 ga. body and 18 ga. blades, equal to
Ruskin or Greenheck with vinyl blade seal and locking hand operator
quadrant.
2. Round: Minimum 20 ga. body and 22 ga. blades, equal to Ruskin or
Greenheck with locking hand operator
C. Control Dampers:
1. Control dampers shall be furnished by AHU Manufacturer or Control
System.
D. All dampers shall be capable of 100% seal off.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
A. All ductwork not specifically indicated on drawings or specified elsewhere to be
high- pressure duct shall be fabricated, braced and erected in accordance with
SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standard" or the latest edition of
ASHRAE "Guide".
B. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise noted.
C. Stainless steel and aluminum ductwork shall welded seam.
D. Adhere to drawings as closely as possible. However, where required to meet
structural or other interferences vary the run and shape of ducts and make offsets
during progress of work. Duct routes shall be established and field measurements
shall be taken before duct work is fabricated. Where pipes or other items are "taken-
in" to the duct, streamline collars shall be formed and placed around the item. If
collar obstructs more than 20% of the cross sectional area, the duct shall be enlarged
to accommodate obstruction.
E. All changes of direction and elbows shall be fitted with turning vanes. Standard
radius elbows may be used if space permits.
F. Ductwork shall be free of any objectionable self-generating noise or rattles.
23 07 10-5
G. Furnish and install shop fabricated ductwork. Pre-assemble work in shop to the
greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Fabricate
ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent possible.
H. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate
elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width. Limit angular tapers
to 30 degrees for contracting tapers and 20 degrees for expanding tapers.
I. Duct Sealing: All ductwork, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed
in accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. All transverse
joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed.
1. All seams and joints in shop and field fabricated ductwork shall be sealed by
applying duct sealant complying with manufacturer’s recommendations. Tapes
recommended by the sealant manufacturer may used in addition to sealant to achieve
leakage limit requirements.
2. Sealant shall be water based latex UL 181A-M sealant with flame spread of 0 and
smoke developed of 0. Sealants shall be Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro
Seal, Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146 or Design Polymerics DP 1010.
3. Sealing tapes shall be from the same manufacturer as duct sealants.
4. Sealer shall be rated by the manufacturer and shall be suitable for use at the system
pressure classification of applicable ductwork.
5. Except as noted, oil or solvent-based sealants are specifically prohibited.
6. For exterior applications, “Uni-Weather” (United McGill Corporation), solvent-
based sealant, or Foster 32-19 shall be used.
J. Support materials shall be hot dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods,
straps, trim and angles. (Support duct with all thread rods and unistrut as equal
trapeze hangers).
K. Install air flow measuring stations, furnished by Control Contractor, where indicated
on the drawings.
3.02 MANUAL BALANCING DAMPERS:
A. All low pressure branch ducts on either supply, return or exhaust shall be provided
by some means of balancing in addition to dampers at registers.
B. Splitter dampers shall be made of at least the same thickness material as duct
(minimum thickness 22 gage). They shall be securely hinged at air leaving edge and
made of 2 thicknesses so that entering edge presents a rounded surface to air flow.
C. Butterfly dampers shall be made of 16 gage galvanized steel. Butterfly dampers may
be used in widths up to 10" wide. Dampers that require blades over 10" wide shall
be multi-blade louver dampers.
D. Multi-blade louver dampers used for balancing shall be of the opposed blade type.
23 07 10-6
Damper blades shall be constructed of 16 gage steel. Individual blade width shall
not exceed 10" and blade length shall not exceed 48".
E. All dampers shall be so constructed and installed that there shall be no vibration due
to air flow over damper.
F. Extend all handles and levers to outside of insulation.
3.03 ACCESS DOOR:
A. Access doors shall be provided at all dampers, equipment in duct and as indicated on
drawings.
B. Access doors shall be minimum of 12" X 12" unless a larger size is required for
maintenance of equipment or a smaller size must be used because of small duct size.
C. Provide access doors at all fire dampers, smoke dampers, humidifiers, and as
indicated on the drawings.
3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Furnish and install sound isolating flexible connections on the inlet and outlet of
each fan and unit to which duct connectors are made.
B. At least one inch slack shall be allowed in these connections to insure that no
vibration is transmitted from fan to ductwork.
C. The fabric shall either be folded in with the metal or attached with metal collar
frames at each end to prevent air leakage.
3.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Maximum runout shall not exceed lengths indicated on drawings.
B. Ducts shall be supported at intervals indicated in SMACNA and not laid on top of
ceiling.
C. Minimum bend radius shall be as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Ducts shall be run straight and true with minimum offsets, and with excess duct
lengths removed.
E. Connections to ducts and air devices shall be with minimum of one duct diameter
straight into connection (kinked or pinched installations restricting flows are not
acceptable).
F. Connections to duct and air devices shall be air tight.
3.06 TESTS:
A. Test duct systems in accordance with SMACNA latest edition of HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual to achieve air tight systems not exceeding the limits outlined in
the manual. Submit test results.
END OF SECTION
230895 -1 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
SECTION 230895
AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of air terminals work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules and by requirements of this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air terminals
with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in
accordance with ADC standards, and bear ADC Seal.
2. AHRI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in
accordance with ARI 880 "Industry Standard for Air Terminals" and bear ARI
certification seal.
3. NFPA Compliance: Construct air terminals using acoustical and thermal
insulations complying with NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems."
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including performance data
for each size and type of air terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation,
room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and
installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal;
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop
drawings, and maintenance data in maintenance manual.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify
on outside of container type of air terminal and location to be installed. Avoid crushing
or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.
230895 -2 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above
grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering air terminals which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to, the following or equal:
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air terminals of
one
a. Kreuger
b. Tuttle-Bailey
c. Price
d. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
2.02 AIR TERMINALS – SUPPLY AND EXHAUST
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.
B. Terminals shall be pressure independent type. Provide with cross-shaped flow sensor, and
factory damper ready for installation of box damper actuator and electronic controller
provided by control system manufacturer.
C. The casing shall be constructed of coated steel meeting SMACNA or ASHRAE
Standards. Internal insulation shall meet the requirements of NFPA Bulletin 90A and UL
181. Boxes shall have solid galvanized sheet metal liner.
D. Terminal box shall have 24 volt control voltage provided by control system
manufacturer.
E. Furnish each supply air terminal with heating coil as specified on the drawings. Hot water
coils shall be a minimum of two rows.
F. Control system contractor shall provide readout at the graphical computer interface of the
following points:
1. Airflow, CFM
2. Box damper position, and commanded % open.
3. Leaving air temperature.
4. SCR heater operation, and output.
230895 -3 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner
acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS:
A. General: Install air terminals as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other
work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no
case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that
air terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and
retest to demonstrate compliance.
3.04 CLEANING:
A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
230895 -4 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
23 09 90-1
SECTION 23 0990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the requirements and procedures for total mechanical systems
testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities and temperatures of the mechanical systems as
required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.
1. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
a. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges.
b. Return air systems.
c. Exhaust air systems.
d. Outside air systems.
e. Verify control system operation.
2. Contractor shall:
a. Put heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment
into full operation and continue the operation of same during each
working day of testing and balancing.
b. Allow the air balance agency to schedule this work in cooperation
with other trades involved and comply with the completion date.
c. Make available to the balance agency a complete copy of submittal
data on mechanical equipment including pump performance curves,
fan curves, manufacturer's balancing factors and other manufacturers
ratings for installed equipment.
d. Make any changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers or the addition of
dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by TAB
Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.
e. Have strainers and filters clean prior to starting of testing and
balancing activity.
23 09 90-2
B. This section does not include:
1. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems.
2. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing
devices. If
devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the
respective system sections for materials and installation requirements.
3. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
1.02 DEFINITIONS:
A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting
building environmental systems to produce design objectives. It includes:
1. Balance of air distribution;
2. Adjustment of total system to provide design qualities;
3. Electrical measurement;
4. Verification of performance of equipment and automatic controls;
B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal
equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (mains, branches, and
terminals) according to specified design quantities.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for
submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be
used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting and balancing.
F. Terminal: The point where controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system.
These are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return
outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as
registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Agency Data: Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing
agency meets the qualifications specified below.
23 09 90-3
B. Technicians Data: Submit proof that the Test and Balance Staff assigned to
supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures
meet the qualifications specified below.
C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test,
adjust, and balance the building systems.
E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms.
F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal
and signature of the Test and Balance Technician. The reports shall be certified
proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with
the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have
been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the
completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate
record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the
systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below.
G. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,
prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but
must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports
in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft
reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned.
H. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports,
type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete
sets of final reports.
I. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the
referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and
balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other
data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the
project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide contents of
binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:
1. General Information and Summary
2. Air Systems
4. Temperature Control Systems
J. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:
23 09 90-4
1. General Information And Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,
adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor and Project. Include addresses,
and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a sheet containing
the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified
Test and Balance Technician. Include in this division a listing of the
instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration.
2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms for each
respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of
equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.
3. Air systems report shall include the following:
a. blower RPM;
b. motor full load amperes and voltages;
c. system static pressures, suction and discharge;
d. cfm outside air (for demand controlled ventilation with CO2 sensors,
provide airflow readings at 2 different CO2 levels;
e. entering air temperatures; DB/WB
f. leaving air temperatures; DB/WB
g. main supply, return, and exhaust air ducts cfm, (pitot transverse);
h. each diffuser, grille and register cfm. (Balance to within +/-10% of
design requirements and pressure relationships shown on drawings.)
i. each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and
area;
j. copies of start-up logs;
k. space temperatures and humidity readings; DB/WB
l. pressure drops across coils, filters, dampers, and other equipment in
ducts.
m. pressure profiles of each system.
n. sheave size, brand name, and number.
23 09 90-5
o. belt quantity, stock name, and number.
K. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that required instrumentation has been calibrated
to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of 6 months prior
to starting the project.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Agency Qualifications:
1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing
agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of
responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems
identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include
checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to
meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.
2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall be certified by
National Environmental Balancing Bureaus (NEBB) or Associated Air
Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required
for this project, and having at least one Technician, certified by NEBB or
AABC.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems".
2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance".
3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, Current Systems Volume, Chapter 37,
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
C. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Contracting Officer and
representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the
conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness
for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning
procedures.
23 09 90-6
1.06 ACCEPTANCE:
The Contracting Officer will not accept the building until the systems have been properly
started, balanced, and the TAB Report is approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING:
Before operating the system, perform these steps:
A. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with
design intent.
B. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of air handling equipment, outlets (supply
and return) and temperature control diagrams.
C. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.
D. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to
determine variations of installation from design.
E. Check filters for cleanliness.
F. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and
temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans.
G. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet
factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required
outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.
H. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct
traverses.
I. Place outlet dampers in full open position.
J. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to
facilitate reporting.
K. Verify that motors and bearings have been lubricated.
L. Check fan belt tension.
M. Check fan rotation.
23 09 90-7
3.03 MEASUREMENTS:
A. Provide required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the
tolerances specified in referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly
maintained and protected against damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and
are best suited to the function being measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale
ranges proper for the value being measured.
3.04 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING:
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance
with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards.
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan
speed control levers, and similar control and devices, to show final settings. Mark
with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.
G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications,
and resubmit test results.
3.05 CONTROL SYSTEM VERIFICATION:
A. In conjunction with Control System Vendor, during the process of TAB work,
manipulate control system devices as required to facilitate necessary system TAB.
Provide listing of control system components and/or sequences that are not operating
properly in TAB report and to Control System Vendor.
23 09 90-8
3.06 RECORD AND REPORT DATA:
A. Record data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with,
and on the forms recommended by referenced standards, and as approved on sample
report forms.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical
performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Training:
1. Train maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with personnel the information
contained in Operating and Maintenance Data.
2. Schedule training through the Owner with at least 7 days' prior notice.
END OF SECTION
239000-1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 239000
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish a totally native BACnet-based system. Control system shall be an addition to and an
extension of the existing Building Automation system that serves the existing facility.
B. System
C. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s functional
specifications.
D. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software configuration from
project design data.
E. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases, graphic
displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings,
configuration data, and bid documents.
F. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network cables
needed, and all associated hardware.
G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application controllers,
and input/output devices.
H. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all equipment controllers.
I. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor
name of every item supplied.
J. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of system
installation, startup, and commissioning.
K. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.
L. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other associated
project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum total
of which accurately represents the final system.
M. All measurable points on each piece of hardware, duct, or equipment monitored by the building
control system shall be made available to view, control, and trend from the user interface.
1.02. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall be
provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment, using native BACnet-
compliant components. Non-BACnet-compliant or proprietary equipment or systems
239000-2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
(including gateways) shall not be acceptable and are specifically prohibited.
B. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room
temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits and set
desired override time. User shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital sensor.
Include all necessary wiring and firmware such that room sensor includes field service mode.
1.03. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. To facilitate system integration into the existing campus network, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated shall be limited to the following:
1. Siemens Desigo.
2. No substitutions or alternatives shall be accepted.
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Responsibility: The supplier of the EMCS shall be responsible for inspection and Quality
Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished.
B. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high-
quality, pre-tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC
components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
C. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The EMCS supplier shall provide all tools, testing,
and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the system.
D. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of five years and be the
authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
E. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by representative’s
local office that must be within 75 miles of project site.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings
1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of
materials for approval.
2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” (ANSI B).
3. Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.
4. Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.
1.06. WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of
one year from completion of system acceptance.
B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or
239000-3 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum
acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours Monday through
Friday, 48 hours on Saturday and Sunday.
C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01. BACnet APPLICATION EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS
A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each controlled piece of
equipment. All controllers shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet
protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained
logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable
using graphical programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident at the operator
workstation.
B. BACnet Conformance
1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They
shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as
native BACnet devices. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3
and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional
groups:
a. Files Functional Group
b. Reinitialize Functional Group
c. Device Communications Functional Group
2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
2. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum—Analog Input,
Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File,
and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept 3K and
10K thermistors, 0–10VDC, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on a
controller may be either analog or digital with a minimum of 3 inputs that accept pulses.
Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent
room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs on board.
Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0–10VDC or 0–20mA. Software shall
include scaling features for analog outputs. Application controller shall include 24VDC voltage
supply for use as power supply to external sensors.
239000-4 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries
shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller
10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices. All
calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and system shall support display of all
information in floating-point nomenclature at operator’s terminal. Programming of application
controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over the installed BACnet LANs from the
Touch Screen Interface.
E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see section 2.9.B.)
Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application controller and include
an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be
programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed
on the sensor.
2.02. SENSORS and MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Temperature Sensors
1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within 0.5°F,
totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall sensors to be
installed as indicated on drawings. Mount top of thermostat at approximately 44 inches
above finished floor, align with light switch of associated room. Duct sensors to be
installed such that the sensing element is in the main air stream.
B. Room Sensor with LCD Readout
1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with
temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow
occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use—all
within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service
technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.
2. Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside
temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be
programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to match
their application.
3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count down
shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor. Time remaining
shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied mode unless a
function button is pressed.
2.03. ENCLOSURES
A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.
B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor
enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.
C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.
D. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or electrical
room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8” thick
239000-5 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
sized appropriately to make label easy to read.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01. EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work
is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
3.02. INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and
programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences
of operation and point schedules.
3.03. INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING
A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally,
in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local electrical codes.
B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment
manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for
all communications trunks.
C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect
switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required.
Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative
prior to rough-in.
D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.
E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated
on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor.
F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in
raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code
requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run
with plenum rated cable (without conduit).
3.04. TRAINING
A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.
B. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 8 hours as part of this contract.
239000-6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 1
SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required and install complete and make operational,
electrical system as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. The work shall include the following:
1. Coordinate the electrical service requirements with the power company and provide the
electrical service(s) from the Power Company at the locations indicated.
2. Provide conduit, wire and field connections for all equipment, HVAC systems,
panelboards, transformers, and electrical equipment furnished under Divisions 1, 11, 21,
22, 23, and 26.
C. Each bidder or their authorized representatives shall, before preparing their proposal, visit all
areas of the existing buildings and structures in which work under this sub-bid is to be
performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this
bidder shall be considered evidence that their representative has visited the buildings and
structures and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and
that he/she takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his/her
work.
2.1 SUBMITTALS
A. As a minimum all equipment specified in each Section of Division 26 shall be submitted at one
time. As an example all lighting fixtures shall be submitted together, all motor control centers
shall be submitted together, etc. Submittals that do not comply will be returned disapproved.
B. Mark submittals to clearly identify proposed equipment including accessories, options, and
features and to exclude parts not applicable to the project. When manufacturer’s cut sheets
apply to a product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to the
project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each submittal piece of
literature and each submittal drawing shall clearly reference the Project Specification and/or
Contract Drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs will not be accepted as cut
sheets to fulfill submittal requirements.
C. Check shop drawings for accuracy prior to submittal. Shop drawings shall be stamped with the
date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to this Section and the
Drawings. This statement shall also list all exceptions to this Section and the Drawings. Mark
submittals to identify proposed equipment including accessories, options and features being
proposed for approval and exclude parts not to be used. Shop drawings not so checked and
noted shall be returned marked NOT APPROVED.
D. The Engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project and
compliance with this Section and the Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 2
drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and
workmanship required by this Section and the Drawings.
E. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all other
trades.
F. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No
material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked “APPROVED AS
NOTED - CONFIRM," "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED."
G. Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Submit operations and maintenance data for equipment furnished under this Division, in
accordance with Section 017823. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this
installation and shall include catalog data sheets, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions,
parts lists including replacement part numbers, to instruct operating and maintenance
personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.
2. Manuals shall include the following as a minimum:
a. A complete "As-Built" set of approved shop drawings.
b. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges and
pertinent data.
c. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied.
H. Exceptions for Submittals
1. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly defined by the Electrical
Subcontractor in a separate section of each submittal package. The submittal shall
contain the reason for the exception, the exact nature of the exception and the proposed
substitution so that a proper evaluation may be made by the Engineer. The acceptability
of any device or methodology submitted as an “or equal” or “exception” to the
Specifications shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer.
I. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following codes.
Code 1 - "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal.
When returned under this code the Contractor may release the equipment and/or material for
manufacture.
Code 2 - "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of the
notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. The Contractor may release the
equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be
incorporated into the final product.
Code 3 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is assigned when
a confirmation of the notations and comments IS required by the Contractor. The Contractor
may, at his own risk, release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations
and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall specifically
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 3
address each omission and nonconforming item that was noted. Confirmation is to be received
by the Engineer within 10 calendar days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the
confirmation.
Code 4 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is assigned when
notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the package. This
resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted.
Resubmittal is to be received by the Engineer within 15 calendar days of the date of the
Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.
Code 5 - "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the
submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different
manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract Documents.
Code 6 - "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached to the
returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the Contractor.
Code 7 - "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED" - This code is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a
submittal that is not subject to the Engineer’s review and approval; and, is being filed for
informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledging receipt of means
and methods of construction work plan, field conformance test reports, and Health and Safety
plans.
Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing there has
been an attachment of additional data.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC).
B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid
opening shall apply.
4.1 PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy
between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and
the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance
requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method which
represents the most stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity.
B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work not dimensioned
shall be as directed by the Engineer and work not particularly shown, identified, sized, or
located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 4
C. Detailed Drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale Drawings take precedence
over smaller scale Drawings, Change Order Drawings shall govern over Contract Drawings and
Contract Drawings shall govern over Shop Drawings.
D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract
Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or
association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more
stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or
discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be
binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that
compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an
extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with
all Laws and Regulations at all times
5.1 SERVICE AND METERING
A. Service is existing at 208 Volts, 3Phase, 4Wire, 60 Hz.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following work:
1. Obtain an estimate from the power company for the work described above and include
the cost of the power company work in the Bid Price.
2. Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining electrical service, pay all
power company charges.
6.1 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES
A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority
having jurisdiction.
B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
7.1 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the Drawings do not show exact locations of conduit
runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.
B. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
C. Conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed
concealed. Unless otherwise indicated install branch circuit conduits exposed in process/
industrial type spaces and concealed in finished spaces.
D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a
complete raceway installation. Where home-runs indicate conduit is to be installed concealed
or exposed the entire branch circuit shall be installed in the same manner.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 5
E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles
prior to installation.
F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar
devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant
to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as
directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in
an approved manner.
G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.
Furnish all labor and materials to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting
and other electrical systems shown.
H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of an
alternate item, arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be
done by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the
work, either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign.
I. Raceways and conductors for low voltage (120 Volts) thermostats controlling HVAC unit
heaters, exhaust fans and similar equipment are not shown on the Drawings. Provide raceways
and conductors between the thermostats, the HVAC equipment and the motor starters for a
complete and operating system. Raceways shall be installed concealed in all finished space and
may be installed concealed or exposed in process spaces. Refer to the HVAC drawings for the
locations of the thermostats.
8.1 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT
A. Investigate each space in the structure through which electrical equipment furnished under
Division 26 must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the
manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.
B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment
must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to ensure that the tilting
does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.
9.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of Project Contract Drawings,
hereinafter called the "Record Drawings."
10.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new.
B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be
UL listed.
11.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260000 - 6
A. Identify equipment, disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations,
etc. furnished under Division 26 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control
centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes,
transfer switches, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings.
B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by
2-1/2-in with 3/16-in high white letters on a black background.
C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA 1 enclosures. Nameplates shall be bonded to all
other enclosure types using an epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two sided
foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. Where the equipment size does not have space for
mounting a nameplate the nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the adjacent mounting
surface.
PART 2 EXECUTION
1.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work not installed according to the Drawings and Specification shall be subject to change as
directed by the Engineer at Contractor's expense.
B. Electrical equipment shall be protected against mechanical and water damage. Store all
electrical equipment in dry permanent shelters. Do not install electrical equipment in place until
structures are weather-tight.
C. Damaged equipment shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer, at the
Engineer's discretion and at the Contractor's expense.
D. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the
equipment manufacturer.
2.1 WORK SUPERVISION
A. The Contractor shall designate in writing the qualified electrical supervisor who shall provide
supervision to all electrical work on this project. The minimum qualifications for the electrical
supervisor shall be a master electrician as defined by the Arkansas Board of Electrical
Examiners. The supervisor or his appointed alternate possessing at least a journeyman
electrician license shall be on site whenever electrical work is being performed. The
qualifications of the electrical supervisor shall be subject to approval of the Owner and the
Engineer.
B. All master and journeyman electricians shall be licensed in accordance with Arkansas Code
Title 17 Chapter 28 - Electricians. The website located at http://www.arkleg.state.ar.us
publishes the text of this statutory requirement. No unlicensed electrical workers shall perform
work on this project. Apprentice electricians in a ratio of not more than one apprentice per
journeyman electrician will be allowed if the apprentices are licensed and actively participating
in an apprenticeship program recognized and approved by the Arkansas Board of Electrical
Examiners.
END OF SECTION 260000
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems
communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with
an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Cerro Wire LLC.
2. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
3. Okonite Company (The).
4. Southwire Company.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and use.
2. RoHS compliant.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's
"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8
for stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719.
2. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
3. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854.
4. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.
5. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83.
6. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,
type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set
screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Copper.
2. Type: One hole with long barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and
larger.
B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors
in raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
END OF SECTION 260519
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.
3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be as specified under Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables.”
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,
tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.
E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.
F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.
G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
H. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.
I. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.
J. Water Pipe Clamps:
1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.
a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.
b. Listed for direct burial.
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
B. Ground Plates: 1/4 inch thick, hot-dip galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the
ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if
any.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test
wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are
connected.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms.
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Conduit and cable support devices.
3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.
4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.
5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,
mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and
hanger rods.
6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support
systems.
1. Hangers. Include product data for components.
2. Slotted support systems.
3. Equipment supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-
(10-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. in at least one surface.
1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel.
3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.
4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-
4.
5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4.
7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable
iron.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS
Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers
and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter:
1. NECA 1.
2. NECA 101
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
B. Comply with requirements in "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and
installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
article.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58,Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with
MSS SP-69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for
reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
END OF SECTION 260529
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
b. Republic Conduit.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
a. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
b. Republic Conduit.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
3. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
4. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and
NFPA 70.
5. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Compression.
6. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
7. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities
having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and
protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. CANTEX INC.
b. RACO; Hubbell.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
B. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3
1. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
3. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
C. Nonmetallic Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. CANTEX INC.
b. RACO; Hubbell.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use.
3. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type
and material.
4. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
5. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, or
Type 12 based on installation location, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.
2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.
3. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
4. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
5. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal.
2. Type: Fully adjustable.
3. Shape: Rectangular.
4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
L. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5
4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".
7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried except for incoming
utility service shall be concrete encased.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a. Loading dock.
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
c. Mechanical rooms.
d. Electrical rooms
e. Gymnasiums.
2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6
3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating
equipment.
D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
F. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to
NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material
and size involved.
J. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.
L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.
M. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
P. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature
change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F
temperature change.
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8
S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings or in Specification 262726 “Wiring Devices”. If
mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements.
Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.
V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified.
3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-up at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout length of elbow.
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the
coupling.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of
60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding
bushings on terminations at equipment.
5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings
to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs.
2. Labels.
3. Tapes and stencils.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
3. Color for Neutral: White.
4. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.
5. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.
B. Warning Label Colors:
1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
C. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 SIGNS
A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:
1. Engraved legend.
2. Thickness:
a. For signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.
c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
d. Self-adhesive.
e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,
manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation
and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance
of electrical systems and connected items.
G. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean
substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by
manufacturer of identification product.
H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely
encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
K. Underground Line Warning Tape:
1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly
above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Equipment Identification Labels:
1. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label.
2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign.
END OF SECTION 260553
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
B. SPD: Surge protective device.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.
2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,
knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.
3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.
7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Enclosures: Flush or Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive
Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
2. Height: 84 inches maximum.
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.
E. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
F. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in
the panelboard.
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar
for each pole in the panelboard.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
G. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and
necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting
capacity.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying
with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 or Type 2 as shown on drawings.
2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. All circuit breakers 1200A and higher shall be equipped with energy-reducing maintenance
switching with local status in order to provide arc energy reduction per NEC 240.87
C. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.
b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:
a. RMS sensing.
b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.
c. Field-Adjustable Settings:
1) Instantaneous trip.
2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3) Long and short time adjustments.
4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
6. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.
7. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,
and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC
rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
D. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back
box.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
F. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to
ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,
and connections to separate ground bars.
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning
signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.
Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 262416
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
4. Molded-case switches.
5. Horsepower Rated Toggle Disconnect Switch
6. Enclosures.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
accessories, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective
devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single throw.
2. Three pole.
3. 600-V ac.
4. 1200 A and smaller.
5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate
indicated fuses.
6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in
closed position.
C. Accessories (as required per plans):
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum
neutral conductors.
4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and
NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Accessories (as required per plans):
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum
neutral conductors.
4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton.
2. SIEMENS Industry, Inc.; Energy Management Division.
3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
a. If Square D, project shall be quoted, ordered, and managed by Randall Robinette in
Little Rock Field Office. Phone# 501-803-9494.
B. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying
components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.
C. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles,
which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be
over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip
indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to
providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push-to-trip button, located
on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping
mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.
D. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable
voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit
breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated or series rated as indicated on the Drawings.
combinations for series connected interrupting ratings shall be listed by UL as recognized
component combinations. Any series rated combination used shall be marked on the end-use
equipment along with the statement "Caution - Series Rated System. _____ Amps Available.
Identical Replacement Component Required."
E. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4
F. Lugs shall be suitable for 167 deg F rated wire.
G. Standards: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault
currents.
H. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
I. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,
field-adjustable trip setting.
J. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the field-
adjustable settings as indicated on drawings.
K. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
2.5 Horsepower Rated, Toggle Switch Type Disconnect Switch
A. Toggle type disconnect switches shall be manufactured of thermoplastic materials with screw-
type terminals. The switches shall be rated 600 VAC and 20A at 600 VAC.
B. Toggle type disconnect switches shall be similar to a manual non-reversing starter without
overloads and shall be 3 Pole, capable of “on-off” control of a 10 horsepower motor at 460
VAC.
C. Enclosure shall be provided with lock off provisions.
D. NEMA 4 enclosures shall be die-cast zinc.
E. Switches shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co.; Siemens Electrical Products; Cutler-
Hammer or equal.
2.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure rating shall be equal to or greater than the fuse or circuit breaker rating.
C. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be as indicated on drawings.
D. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts.
NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both
endwalls.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5
E. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with
the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover. The cover interlock
mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently
disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is
released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter
the enclosure in order to override the interlock.
F. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K shall have a dual
cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the
circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is
open.
G. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit to allow their
use in outdoor and wet location applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the
following environmental ratings.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances
for equipment access doors and panels.
C. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless
otherwise indicated.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E. Install fuses in fusible devices. Fuse Ratings for mechanical equipment or transformers shall
match the rating of the upstream circuit breaker feeding the equipment.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
a. Label on each disconnect means shall include both purpose and source, such as
“AHU-1. Fed from Panel MDP”
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections for Switches:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
c. Verify that the unit is clean.
d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation.
e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings.
f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two
following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar
bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the
Specifications and shown on the Drawings.
i. Verify correct phase barrier installation.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 7
j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding
surfaces.
B. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and
shown on the Drawings.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two
following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar
bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated
torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use
NETA ATS Table 100.12.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units.
h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the
coordination study.
C. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
END OF SECTION 262816